visual landscape planning in western australia a manual

November 2007

Environment and Sustainability DirectorateDepartment for Planning and Infrastructure

Visual LandscapePlanning in Western Australiaa manual for evaluation,assessment, siting and design

ii Visual Landscape Planning in Western Australia a manual for evaluation, assessment, siting and design

© State of Western Australia

Published by theWestern Australian Planning CommissionAlbert Facey House469 Wellington StreetPerth WA 6000

Published November 2007

ISBN 0 7309 9637 9

website: www.wapc.wa.gov.auemail: [email protected]

tel: 08 9264 7777fax: 08 9264 7566TTY: 08 9264 7535infoline: 1800 626 477

Western Australian Planning Commission owns allphotography in this document unless otherwise stated.

This document is available in alternative formats onapplication to WAPC Communication Services.

Disclaimer

This document has been published by theWestern Australian Planning Commission. Anyrepresentation, statement, opinion or adviceexpressed or implied in this publication is madein good faith and on the basis that thegovernment, its employees and agents are notliable for any damage or loss whatsoever whichmay occur as a result of action taken or nottaken, as the case may be in respect of anyrepresentation, statement, opinion or advicereferred to herein. Professional advice should beobtained before applying the informationcontained in this document to particularcircumstances.

iiiVisual Landscape Planning in Western Australia a manual for evaluation, assessment, siting and design

Preface

This manual was produced by staff of theDepartment for Planning and Infrastructure withthe support of an interagency working groupcomprising officers from the Department ofEnvironment and Conservation, Main Roads WAand other agencies that deal with landscape.

The protection of landscape values is nowexpected by communities. Proposals which passother tests, such as economic development andenvironmental management, are no longeraccepted if they mar the view or impair highlyvalued landscapes. Yet there is no formalplanning policy at a state or local level on visualimpact and little in the way of guidance in settingobjectives and undertaking assessments ofimpacts on the visual landscape.

This manual is intended to be a valuable initialresource for developers and planners in filling thegap.

The Western Australian Planning Commissionsupports visual landscape planning in WesternAustralia, so that the practice of visual landscapeplanning can evolve and mature. We do not wantto see another layer of planning added to analready complex system. Instead, visuallandscape planning must become simply aroutine consideration amongst the manyconsiderations that planning authorities andplanners take into account when making plansand assessing proposals.

It is essential that planning authorities whichrespond to this new expectation do so in asystematic way. They must identify valuedlandscapes and specify the qualities of thelandscapes that they wish to heal, restore,reinforce and protect. They must translate thesepolicies into rules and criteria. They must beexplicit about what they want in the landscape,and then express this succinctly in their localplanning strategy.

The WAPC has requested the Department forPlanning and Infrastructure to apply thisapproach in plan making and developmentassessment, so that, through case-by-caseapplication and testing, skills and experience inthis area will improve over time.

I commend this manual to all planners and localgovernments, and encourage you to contribute toits further development.

Jeremy Dawkins

ChairmanWestern AustralianPlanning Commission

iv Visual Landscape Planning in Western Australia a manual for evaluation, assessment, siting and design

vVisual Landscape Planning in Western Australia a manual for evaluation, assessment, siting and design

Contents

Bibliography 155

Appendices 160

Appendix 1: Table 1 and Table 5 160

Appendix 2: Existing planningmechanisms 162

Appendix 3: Relevant policy measures 165

Appendix 4: Implementationand planning applications 166

Appendix 5: Glossary 171

Appendix 6: Status of visual landscapeplanning in Western Australia- state and local government 173

Appendix 7: Visual landscape characterpreference indicators 175

Appendix 8: Methods case study 178

Appendix 9: Strategies for location, sitingand design to achieve eachspecific visual managmentobjective 181

Appendix 10: Deciding on location, sitingand detailed design 184

Acknowledgments 185

Feedback Form 187

List of Figures

Figure 2.1: The relationship betweenvisual landscape evaluationand visual impact assessment 14

Figure 2.2: Visual landscape evaluationmethod with mapping outputs 16

Figure 2.3: Natural landcape character 20

Figure 2.4: Rural landscape character 21

Figure 2.5: Built landscape character 22

PART ONE - Introduction 1

1.1 Introduction 3

1.2 The planning context 3

1.3 Visual landscape in the planningsystem 5

1.4 Scope of the manual 5

PART TWO - Visual LandscapePlanning Methods 7

Background 9

2.1 Introduction 13

2.2 Visual landscape evaluation 16

2.3 Visual impact assessment 44

2.4 Tools and techniques forvisual landscape planning 53

PART THREE - Guidelinesfor Location, Siting and Design 63

3.1 Introduction 65

3.2 Valued landscapes under pressure 71

3.3 Guidelines for particular land uses 87

vi Visual Landscape Planning in Western Australia a manual for evaluation, assessment, siting and design

Figure 2.6: Excerpt from landscapecharacter units map illustratingdivision of the landscape intooverlapping categoriescomprising both physiographicunits and categories tha tarebased on land use 24

Figure 2.7: An example of regionallandscape character unitsmapped at a state level 25

Figure 2.8: For visual landscape evaluationat local level, landscapecharacter units are divided intosmaller units 26

Figure 2.9: Hypothetical illustration oflandscape character unitsmapped at a site level 27

Figure 2.10: Excerpt from generalviewing experience map 31

Figure 2.11: Hypothetical illustration ofdistance zones (not to scale) 33

Figure 2.12: Community identificationof major views, preferredfeatures and least preferredfeatures (excerpt) 35

Figure 2.13: Excerpt from communityperceptions map, illustratingmost preferred and leastpreferred areas identified bythe community advisory group 36

Figure 2.14: Example of a site level visuallandscape strategy map, withrecommendations groupedaccording to relative prominenceof portions of the site 42

Figure 2.15: Landscape managementstrategies map (excerpt)illustrating howrecommendations may bepresented as annotations ona map 43

Figure 2.16: This figure from the Kwinanawaste site proposal illustrateshow a landform analysiscould be mapped 46

Figure 2.17: Simulated view of theproposed Kwinana waste siteprovides an indication of howthe proposed developmentwould look from this importantview location on Patterson Road 47

Figure 2.18: Simulated view of proposedwaste site at Kwinana,showing stages over time 49

Figure 2.19: Planting that would beestablished to screen theproposed waste site at Kwinana 50

Figure 2.20: Cross-sections to determinevisibility objective for PortCoogee proposed developmentby using screening to reducevisibility 51

Figure 2.21: Air photo overlaid withannotations indicating locationsfrom which ground levelphotographs were taken withangle brackets showing directionand width of views 54

Figure 2.22: Photo simulations to illustratealternative developmentproposals, allowing comparisonas in this proposed plant on theBurrup Penisular 56

Figure 2.23: Oblique aerial photographyto illustrate position of majorridge crest through developmentsite 57

Figure 2.24: Hypothetical viewshed froma road comprising combinedviewsheds from viewpoints atregular intervals along the road 57

Figure 2.25: Hypothetical viewshed froma single viewpoint 59

Figure 2.26: Seen area analysis – air photooverlaid with area seen fromkey viewing locations illustratingthe relative prominence ofvarious portions of the site 60

Figure 3.1: Hypothetical hillside profile,illustrating locations in whichdevelopment would be visibleon the skyline from severalobserver positions 107

Figure 3.2: Clustering of rural residentialdevelopment enablesdevelopment to beconcentrated in less visuallysensitive portions of a site,while the remainder maintainsits existing character or maybe revegetated 109

Figure 3.3: Hypothetical examples of thebasic elements in a strategicplanting plan for a ruralresidential development 115

Figure 3.4: Pattern of the plantation areas 119

Figure 3.5: Plantation shape and edges 119

Figure 3.6: Remnant vegetation 120

Figure 3.7: Complementing locallandscape character 120

Figure 3.8: Maintaining keyviews from travel routes 120

Figure 3.9: Visual contrasts 121

viiVisual Landscape Planning in Western Australia a manual for evaluation, assessment, siting and design

Figure 3.10: Configurationof side boundaries 122

Figure 3.11: Plantations in moreintensive agricultural areas 122

Figure 3.12: Plantation siting inrelation to topography 123

Figure 3.13: Plantation accessroads and fire breaks 123

Figure 3.14: Visual access 123

Figure 3.15: Roadside shelterbelts 124

Figure 3.16: Roadside buffer strips 124

Figure 3.17: Ridge-top plantations 125

Figure 3.18: Thinning regimes 125

Figure 3.19: Harvest areas should be ofminimal size in relation to theoverall plantation 126

Figure 3.20: Dispersion of harvest areas 126

Figure 3.21: Sequence of harvesting 127

Figure 3.22: Sequence establishmentand harvesting 127

Figure 3.23: Avoid siting telecommunicationtowers on the shoulders of thehigh points 137

Figure 3.24: Short and long distance views 138

Figure 3.25: Avoid locating towers directlyin the focus of the view 138

Figure 3.26: Keep towers awayfrom direct focal areas 138

Figure 3.27: Use existing vegetation toscreen towers from focal views 138

Figure 3.28: Use local topography to reducethe overall height of towers 138

Figure 3.29: Locate towers close to existingfeatures of a similar scale 138

Figure 3.30: Avoid clutter that is notstreamlined with the tower 139

Figure 3.31: Combine several towers into one,to reduce visual clutter 139

Figure 3.32: Reduce the visible bulkof the tower 139

Figure 3.33: Towers should be placed belowthe crest of a hill or horizon linethat reduces the impacts againstthe skyline 142

Figure 3.34: Many designs for transmissionline towers are available 142

Figure 3.35: Screening access roads 147

Appendix 3Figure 1: The Shire of Busselton

Caves Road policy 168

List of Tables

Table 1: Types of plans that are relevant toeach scale of application andassessment detail required at eachlevel of application 160

Table 2: Examples of terminology for describingvisual aspects of landscape character 19

Table 3: Examples of elements (natural, rural,built) that may be described at eachscale of application: regional, localand site 23

Table 4: Examples of mapping landscapecharacter units at the three scales ofapplication 24

Table 5: Levels of significance relating toviewing locations and viewerexperience 161

Table 6: Examples of viewing experiencesat each scale of application 29

Table 7: Examples of landscape features thatmay exist in landscapes that arehighly valued by the community fortheir visual character 34

Table 8: Examples of landscape issuesat each scale of application 37

Table 9: Examples of visual impactassessments undertaken at eachplanning level 45

Table 10: An example of a field surveyrecord sheet 55

viii Visual Landscape Planning in Western Australia a manual for evaluation, assessment, siting and design

PART ONE - Introduction1.1 Introduction 3

1.2 The planning context 3

1.3 Visual landscape in the

planning system 5

1.4 Scope of the manual 5

1Visual Landscape Planning in Western Australia a manual for evaluation, assessment, siting and design

2 Visual Landscape Planning in Western Australia a manual for evaluation, assessment, siting and design


PART ONE

1.2 The planning context

The planning system provides the context for themethodology set out in the manual. In this context,landscape is one of many considerations whichmust be taken into account in planning for thesustainable use and development of land.Landscapes are important but not to the exclusionof other factors in planning decision-making. Theaim should be to accommodate change whilemaintaining and, where possible, enhancing thequality of our landscapes.

To achieve this aim, the visual landscape needs tobe considered at all levels of the WA planningsystem.

The State planning framework sets out thegeneral principles for planning and developmentand brings existing state and regional policies,strategies and guidelines into a central andcomprehensive framework. It provides a contextfor spatial planning and decision making by theWAPC, local governments and other responsibleauthorities. In particular, it informs responsibleauthorities of those aspects of state and regionalpolicy which are to be given effect across allaspects of planning.

The State Planning Strategy states that one of thecriteria for plans is to “ensure that significantlandscapes are identified and protected” and“that development proposals incorporatemeasures to retain or enhance landscapeelements and vegetation”.

State Planning Policy No 2: Environment andNatural Resource Policy elaborates on theimportance of protecting and enhancinglandscapes by stating that planning strategies,schemes and decision making should:

- identify and protect landscapes with highnatural resource values (such as ecological,aesthetic or geological) and encourage therestoration of degraded landscapes;

1.1 Introduction

This manual provides advice to state agencies,local governments, developers and thecommunity on techniques for incorporating visuallandscape planning into the planning system.

The landscape character of Western Australiavaries greatly and it is important that this diversityis enhanced in planning policy and statutorydecision making. Landscapes are a fundamentalpart of our history and cultural heritage. Thelandscapes of the state are valuable for theirintrinsic qualities, for the quality of life andenjoyment of people, and for the economicbenefits they bring.

Visual landscape planning helps us to understandand articulate the character of the landscape andidentify those features that contribute to scenicquality and sense of place.

This manual is not an academic text, statutoryprocedure or prescriptive policy for visuallandscape planning and management for WesternAustralia. It deals primarily with the visual aspectof landscape, while recognising the importance ofthe more holistic social, cultural, environmental,economic and aesthetic factors as well. These areimportant factors but are beyond the scope of thisdocument.

The manual has been developed by theDepartment for Planning and Infrastructure withthe assistance of a working group including theDepartment of Environment and Conservation(DEC)1 and Main Roads WA.

Visual landscape evaluation and visual impactassessment are evolving practices which arecontinuing to develop to take into account newand emerging issues and techniques. Thismanual should, therefore, be regarded as a ‘workin progress’. It has been produced as a first stepin visual landscape planning and will be used asa guide so that the practices of visual landscapeevaluation and visual impact assessment cancontinue to evolve and mature over time.

1 The Department of Conservation and Land Management (CALM)merged with the Department of Environment (DoE) forming thenew Department of Environment and Conservation (DEC) on 1July 2006.

PART ONE

Local planning schemes provide the statutorymechanisms to implement local planningstrategies through zonings, reservations andplanning controls. Some schemes haveintroduced landscape zonings to protect andenhance local landscapes by controlling land useand development which could adversely impacton the landscape and ensure new developmentcomplements and enhances the landscape. TheWAPC favours the use of special control areas toidentify significant landscapes in local schemesand apply planning controls to conserve andenhance the character of these landscapes.Performance based policies, following a rigorousassessment of the landscape concerned, canalso be used.

Development assessment is generally requiredfor developing land or buildings, or changing theiruse. Planning approval is usually obtained fromthe local government but, in some cases,approval may be required from the WAPC. TheWAPC is also responsible for subdivisionapproval. The careful assessment anddetermination of planning and subdivisionapplications is important in ensuring state,regional and local objectives for the landscapeare met and plans and policies put into place.

- consider the capacity of landscapes toabsorb development and the need forcareful planning, siting and design of newdevelopment in a way which is sensitive tothe character of the landscape;

- consider the need for a landscape or visualimpact assessment for developmentproposals that may impact upon sensitivelandscapes.

Regional strategies provide the broad frameworkfor planning at the regional level and the strategiccontext for local planning schemes and regionschemes. Regional strategies should identifylandscapes of regional significance which can beused to underpin planning controls in region andlocal schemes.

Region schemes provide the statutorymechanism to implement regional strategies, co-ordinate the provision of major infrastructure andset aside areas for region open space and othercommunity purposes. The reservation of land forregion open space is fundamental to protectingsignificant regional landscapes and acquiringland for public use and enjoyment.

Local planning strategies set out the generalaims and planning directions of localgovernments to be applied in promoting andcontrolling growth and change in their areas. Thelocal planning strategy interprets state andregional policies at the local level and providesthe rationale for the zones, reservations andplanning controls in the local scheme. Localplanning strategies will identify regional and locallandscapes and help set the objectives andpolicies for the protection and enhancement ofthese landscapes.

Local planning strategies are intended to beworking documents which will be regularlyreviewed and kept up to date. Local goverments,particularly those with areas of significantlandscape value, are encouraged to review andincorporate appropriate landscape policies intheir strategy.


PART ONE

1.3 Visual landscape in theplanning system

Planning systems are best understood ascomprising a plan-making stage and adevelopment assessment stage. The regionaland local strategies and schemes, described inthe previous section, result from plan making.They establish the priorities, criteria and ruleswhich should guide development. Developmentassessment is then the process by whichproposed development is assessed against thesestandards.

This manual adopts the terminology commonlyused by practitioners of visual landscapeplanning in Australia and elsewhere.

Plan making

In preparing planning strategies and schemes,visual landscape evaluation is the tool which isused to understand what gives landscapes theirparticular character and to help frame policiesand rules which protect and enhance thatcharacter.

Development assessment

In development assessment, visual impactassessment is the tool used to assess the impactof development on the landscape to ensure thatdevelopment is sympathetic to the landscapecharacter and complies with adopted policies andrules.

1.4 Scope of the manual

This manual contains 3 parts.

Part 1 – introduction: introduces the manual andsets it within the framework of the planningsystem.

Part 2 – visual landscape planning methods:explains the techniques of visual landscapeevaluation and visual impact assessment in detail.

Part 3 – guidelines for location, siting anddesign: considers land uses and developmentsthat may give rise to potential impacts on differentlandscapes and measures to address theseimpacts.


PART ONE


Background 9

2.1 Introduction 13

2.2 Visual landscape evaluation 16

2.3 Visual impact assessment 44

2.4 Tools and techniques for

visual landscape planning 53

PART TWO -Visual Landscape PlanningMethods


PART TWO

Background

The concept of landscape

Although the visual landscape of WesternAustralia is perceived by many as lacking invariety, when we look more closely we findextraordinary diversity, often subtle and subdued,that is anchored in an ancient and variedphysiology with diverse ecological componentsand characteristics.

Landscapes can be fragile or robust, attractive orunattractive, boring or interesting, complex orsimple, easy or challenging, depending on howhuman beings perceive and respond to theircharacteristics. Perception of and interaction withlandscape is as enigmatic as it is dynamic andchallenging for land managers and planners.

There are many academic and practicaldisciplines that help us understand thelandscapes where we live, work, recreate andtravel. Landscape is where we are: rural or urban,natural or altered. It is a major contributor to ouressence as individuals and as a community andhelps define our sense of place. These are thevery qualities that set one landscape apart fromanother and make it distinctive.

Landscapes change over time, both naturally andthrough human intervention. Efficient managementof these changes is the responsibility of landmanagers, planners, government leaders and allmembers of the community. How changes tolandscape features, processes and systems areperceived and managed depends on a largenumber of human, ecological and culturalvariables.

Planning for change to our visual landscapes isextraordinarily complex, as it must deal withenvironmental alterations in a context of social,economic, cultural, political, spiritual as well asemotional values and sensitivities. The aims of thismanual should assist in resolving conflictsbetween land use and environment, culturalsensitivities and lack of concern, and economicreturn and exploitation.

Conflicts that result in loss of visual landscapevalue are generally the outcome of land usedecisions that overlook inherent visual landscapecharacteristics. There are conflicting opinionswhen it comes to the visual perception oflandscape, there are differing opinions on what isvalued and what is not and this will result indifferent outcomes. Other factors to beconsidered include over-estimating the ability oflandscapes to absorb change, trade-offs thathave taken place, under-estimating negativeimpacts resulting from change, and insensitivity tohistorical or cultural patterns and human valuesystems.

Image 1: Western Australian landscapes areanchored in ancient and varied physiology.

Image 2: The character of landscapes may changedramatically over a short period of time.


PART TWO

Landscapes of Western Australia

Western Australia occupies one third of theAustralian continent from the tropical climates inthe north to the temperate south. The naturallandscapes are extraordinarily diverse includingarid and semi-arid deserts, rugged tropicalsavanna, cliffs, gorges and mountain ranges,wide mallee and scrub covered plains, salt lakes,hilly woodlands and majestic tall forests. The longcoastline is also extraordinarily varied with sandy,rocky and cliff features, mud flats, mangroves,dune systems, sandy coastal plains, inlets andestuaries. Offshore islands and reefs creatediverse seascapes. These landscapes occur on avast scale with changes often occurring graduallyover long distances.

The predominant character of the physiography atthe macro scale is subdued and worn, but in thisare surprisingly dramatic mountain ranges,gorges, incised drainage systems, hills, dunesand special features provide great diversity anddistinction. Associated vegetation patterns alsoprovide magnificent variation in colour, textureand form throughout the seasons and climaticzones. Landscapes of apparent uniformity areoften abundant in diversity at a small or microscale with features such as a cave entrance, drycreek bed or billabong or intense colours inshrubs and minute wildflowers.

The State is also renowned for a number ofseasonal events that transform the character ofthe landscape. These include weather eventssuch as cyclones, the northern wet season,rainfall in the deserts, wind on the coast,ephemeral drizzle on the coastline and seasonaldisplays of unique wildflowers that providelandscape diversity at a detailed level.

Many of Western Australia’s most highly valuednatural landscapes are protected in theconservation estate: national parks, naturereserves, marine parks, marine nature reservesand conservation parks, ensuring that they remainessentially natural in character.

Western Australian landscapes retain much oftheir natural character, although evidence ofchange due to human intervention and landdevelopment is regionally and locally prominent.Areas of naturally established vegetation aredominant throughout much of the northern andinterior eastern regions of the State, with smallerareas of natural forest in the south. Grazing hasaltered vegetation species composition in manylocations.

Image 3: Western Australia’s natural landscapesexhibit a wide range of characteristics.


PART TWO

The modified landscapes of Western Australiaconsist of the rural agricultural lands that stretchfrom the pastoral lands far north, to the wheat andwool areas of the Mid West. The Wheatbelt regionhas a distinct character of broad-acre farming lotswith stands of remnant vegetation, as well asshelter-belts of trees to protect the soils from windand water erosion. The colours of the agriculturalareas over the state vary, with the deep red soilsof the north, the orange dolerite in thewheat-belt, with the occasional York gums, to thegrey granite rock outcrops amongst the farminglots of the Great Southern region. There are manydifferent crops grown in the State, from thedistinct low lying pastures that stretch forkilometres in the north, to the bright yellow canolacrops down in the Lower Great Southern region.Plantations are a regular feature in this regionalso, where the mixed land use of rural areasincreases over time. Vineyards are a dominantrural characteristic of the South-West, with standsof old growth vegetation along the road sides thatcreate a shady, dappled driving experiencethrough the main highways and tourist drives.There are many rural mixed uses in the SouthWest from viticulture, dairy farming, to marketgardens and bed and breakfast homesteads.

Cultural features in this modified landscape rangefrom wind mills to rural housing, old homesteads,water tanks, grape vines, rural style fencing andlivestock nestled against the Darling Scarp on the

way to the South-West, or scattered in the largeexpanse of the pasture fields in the north. Otherevidence of rural mixed uses in the agriculturalareas of the state consists of mine-sites, industrialzones and commercial strips in country townsites. Rural agricultural landscapes are sparselypopulated, but heavily modified.

Some countries, such as the UK, place a highvalue on maintaining historic, scenic or othercharacteristics of their rural landscapes. WesternAustralia’s image has been shaped and definedby its rural and remote landscapes. However,rural areas have been somewhat under valued fortheir inherent visual, aesthetic character, andlandscape quality tends to be overlooked instatutory processes in rural areas, instead theperception of the land has primarily been in termsof economic return. In recent years there hasbeen some indication that community attitudestoward rural landscapes are changing; with agreater priority being placed on action to addresslandscape values and changes to rural character,as well as other environmental concerns such asland degradation, loss of biodiversity, and waterquality.

Built landscapes are the most highly modified,and are significant to the communities of WesternAustralia, partly because they are the landscapesexperienced by the majority of people on a dailybasis. The metropolitan area of the state capitalPerth and the CBD display a strong cultural

Image 4: Regional parks protect Perth’s majornatural landscape features, such as the DarlingScarp.

Image 5: Protecting rural landscape character hasbecome a greater priority in Western Australia.


landscape from the tall glassy skyscrapers to themore historic buildings that still remain on themajor streets of the city. Portions of the builtlandscape are protected through creativedevelopment of urban heritage precincts, specialhistoric urban communities and establishment ofurban parks and bushland reserves. Thisprotection of heritage precincts has occurred inother cities in Western Australia such asFremantle, Kalgoorlie, Bunbury and Albany.Regional towns also have significant portions ofbuilt landscape that display the historic nature ofthe towns such as Broome, York, Margaret River,Yallingup and Esperance.

Visual landscape planning methods

There has been a need to develop and documentvisual landscape evaluation and visual impactassessment procedures that more closely meetthe requirements of government planners,planning consultants and developers. There hasalso been an expressed need for cross-agencyguidelines to assess the possible visual impactsof a number of specific land use types, as well asinvestigation of both statutory and non-statutoryplanning mechanisms that assist in the protectionof landscape.

The development of visual landscapemethodologies has evolved over the past 40years, both globally and in Australia. Numeroussummaries of this body of historical work havebeen researched, documented and assessmentsmade (refer to the Bibliography for acomprehensive list of readings and research).

The visual landscape management systemdeveloped by the Department of Environment andConservation (DEC) (Appendix 6) has suited therequirements of that agency in broad scaleplanning and managing its public lands, primarilyin natural settings. There has been a call for avisual landscape planning model for private land(consisting of natural, rural and built landscapes)that would complement the DEC system.

Western Australia has no single model for visuallandscape planning in the context of the currentplanning system. Visual landscape inventorymethods differ with dynamic landscape factorsand requirements of application. Various methodshave been designed to suit the specific needs ofplanning and management agencies, researchersand individual practitioners, but there has beenno single visual landscape methodology that suitsall planning applications.

There are several broad steps common to mostvisual landscape planning methodologies and themethods developed for this manual are consistentwith these. The visual landscape evaluation modelpromoted in this manual consists of five steps.

Step 1: Define the scope of the evaluationand set the context.

Step 2: Describe the visual landscapecharacter.

Step 3: Evaluate the way the visuallandscape character is viewed,experienced and valued.

Step 4: Develop strategies for managingvisual landscape character.

Step 5: Implementation strategies throughthe planning system.

Image 6: Portions of the built landscape areprotected as heritage precincts.

PART TWO

There are also standard sequential steps forvisual impact assessment of developmentproposals. The process developed for this manualcomprises five steps.

Step 1: Determine visual managementobjectives.

Step 2: Describe proposed development.

Step 3: Describe the potential visualimpacts.

Step 4: Develop visual managementmeasures.

Step 5: Prepare final recommendations andoptions for monitoring.

The visual landscape evaluation and visualimpact assessment processes presented in thismanual together comprise an effective genericmodel that is a hybrid amalgam of those that havepreceded it.

2.1 Introduction

Awareness that landscape is an issue is usuallyprompted through local community concern orplanning processes calling on a visual landscapeevaluation or visual impact assessment to beundertaken. Land managers, planners andconsultants may use this document in response toany landscape issues that arise. It is not impliedthat land managers and planners will assessevery landscape area they are responsible for.The visual landscape planning methodologiespresented are tailored specifically for addressinglandscape issues in the planning process.

Users of this document can adapt themethodology steps to suit the landscapeissue that needs to be resolved and thespecific planning application. It is importantto note that users do not have to undertakeall steps outlined in the methodology if theyare not relevant to the specific planningapplication.

Visual landscape assessment tools

The relationship between visual landscapeevaluation and visual impact assessment isshown in Figure 2.1.

Visual landscape evaluation is a proactiveprocess used in the preparation of planningstrategies and schemes. Visual impactassessment is essentially reactive in nature foruse in the assessment of development proposals.

Visual landscape evaluation should precedevisual impact assessments to provide thebackground landscape description, establish theappropriate visual character objectives and formthe basis of criteria and rules in strategies andplanning schemes.


PART TWO

• review any relevant strategic plans orguidelines;

• agree on the terms of reference andtechniques to be applied; and

• determine a project time frame and budget.

This will assist in identifying key issues anddetermining relevant sources of information andexpertise.


Setting the scope

The scope and context of the study needs to bedetermined at an early stage of the process. Toset the scope, the investigator needs to:

• review the policy context and planningconsiderations relevant to the landscapeissue;

• consult relevant authorities, developers,statutory planners, tourist interests andlandscape consultants;

• informally consult with stakeholders, andlocal community;

•••••••••••••••••

•••••••••••••••••••

••••••••••••••••••

•••••••••••••••••

Visual landscape evaluation(for use in preparing planning strategies

and schemes)

Visual impact assessment (VIA)(for use in assessing proposals)

Define scope and set context

Evaluate how visual landscape characteris viewed, experienced and valued

Describe visual landscape character

Develop strategies for managing visuallandscape character

Prepare final recommendations and monitoring options

Develop visual management measures

Describe potential visual impacts

Describe proposed development

Determine visual management objectives

ImplementationExisting planning mechanisms

Planning outcomesDevelopment options

Consultation and review

Visual Landscape Planning

Plan making Development assessment

Figure 2.1: Relationship between visual landscape evaluation and visual impact assessment.

PART TWO


Scale

Visual landscape planning can be conducted atone of three scales: regional, local/district and sitelevel, which are the primary planning levels inWestern Australia. Appendix 1 (Table 1) showsthe scale, the different types of plans that apply toeach scale of application, detail required and theamount of professional expertise needed. Thesteps need to be adapted to suit the scale ofplanning application.

Triggers for visual landscapeassessments

State and local government agencies vary in thetriggers that may result in visual landscapeplanning. For example, triggers that affect DECmay be legal in nature, such as the need toapprove proposals that impact on the DECmanaged estate. Planning agencies, includingDPI and local authorities, may require a visuallandscape evaluation as a component of astrategic planning exercise, or require a visualimpact assessment as a component ofassessment of development proposals.

Stakeholder involvement

The term ‘stakeholder’ refers to a wide range ofgroups and individuals who have a direct interestin, or are affected by changes to a region, localityor site. Stakeholders range from communities ofresidents, visitors, landowners and local interestgroups to government agencies, local authorities,consultants and professionals.

Some may have a livelihood, personal or familyinterest, an environmental or scientific interest andothers may be involved in land uses thatcontribute to the form and condition of thelandscape.

All stakeholders, including the general community,and experts such as consultants, landscapearchitects and planners should be involved in thevisual landscape assessment process.

Community consultation and involvement is aimedat creating a greater awareness of communityattitudes towards visual landscape planning.Visual landscape values are not inherent in aphysical sense, they are perceived by thecommunity. For specific ways to involve thecommunity refer to Appendix 4.

Involving all stakeholders will reduce thelikelihood of conflict at the end of the planningprocess. In particular, community participation invisual landscape planning ensures that thecommunity’s perspectives and needs areconsidered.

It is most important to identify who in thecommunity is likely to be interested or have astake in the outcomes, and which sectors of thecommunity are likely to be affected. Methods ofobtaining stakeholder input at desired stages inthe assessment need to be decided. Communityadvisory groups may represent the generalcommunity.

The benefits of involving stakeholders atvarious stages of the planning process are:

• more informed assessments;

• obtaining important local knowledge;

• increased ownership of the outcomes;

• increased participation in thedecision-making process; and

• reduced likelihood of conflict(eg fewer legal appeals).

It is important to note that the involvement ofthe community and relevant stakeholders ismost effective at the local level, where localauthorities can directly develop plans andstrategies that encompass their localcommunity and other stakeholder input, wherespecific development applications may be alocal community concern.

PART TWO


2.2 Visual landscapeevaluation

The visual landscape evaluation methoddeveloped for this manual consists of five steps.Each step is explained in detail; as well as helpfulhints and mapping tips in each step. The stepsare outlined at the beginning of this section foreasy referral. Figure 2.2 illustrates each step ofthe method, including mapping outputs. In thissection the term ‘landscape character’predominately means ‘visual landscapecharacter’.

STEP 5Implement strategies through the planning system

Map 3 - Visual landscape strategies

overlay Map 1 + Map 2+ annotated strategies+ areas of priority for planning and

management= Map 3

Map 2 - Viewing experience and values

key viewsviewing locations and significancevisual character preferences

Map 1 - Landscape character units

uniform patterns of vegetation, topography,water form and land use

Base Map

study area boundarybasic geographical features

STEP 4Develop strategies for managingvisual landscape character

STEP 3Evaluate the way the visual landscape character is viewed,experienced and valued

STEP 2Describe the visual landscapecharacter

STEP 1Define the scope of theassessment/set the context

Figure 2.2: Visual landscape evaluation method with mapping outputs.

PART TWO


Identify the type of planning output your study willfeed into, and the ways in which your outputshould be tailored so it can be incorporated. Forexample, can landscape character units be usedas planning precincts?

Decide the stages at which stakeholder input willbe obtained, and the measures to be used.

The amount of detail required for the visuallandscape assessment will vary according to thescale of application of your project, ie regional,local or site and which steps are applicable toyour project. Some of the detailed steps may notbe applicable to your landscape study area (seeFigure 2.2).

If you decide you need additional help, someoptions are provided in Appendix 1 (Table 1).

Prepare a base map to determine the scale ofapplication and boundary of the study area.

Step 1: Define scope of theevaluation and set the context

• Why is this visual landscape evaluationneeded?

• What are the objectives?

• Who will use the evaluation, and for whatpurpose?

• What is the scale of application?

• What are the boundaries of the landscapebeing considered?

• How much detail is required?Appendix 1 (Table 1)

• What is the role of the expert?Appendix 1 (Table 1)

Outputs

1. decisions about objectives, role of expertsand stakeholders;

2. decision on scale of application;

3. level of detail confirmed; and

4. a generic base map.

There are three components to Step 1:

1. Identify the planning outputs for thisstudy and determine stakeholderinvolvement and methods.

2. Determine appropriate steps andamount of detail that will be required.

3. Gather and document baseinformation that will be required forthis evaluation including the genericbase map.

The base map should include:

• a scale and scale bar

• a north point

• a key describing symbols used torepresent features

• study area boundary.

Supporting information to provide contextshould include:

• roads

• settlements

• all prominent landform features, landmarks and individual features such ashills, headlands, rivers, coastal bays anddistinctive trees

• shire boundaries (if applicable)

• suburb or district boundaries(if applicable)

• planning precincts (if applicable).

Note: if you use aerial photography to produce your base map,the above categories should be superimposed.

PART TWO


Step 2: Describe the visuallandscape character

• What are the individual landscapecharacter units?

• What are the main natural, rural and builtcharacteristics?

• What are the key features in thislandscape?

• What is the visual character of thislandscape?

Outputs

1. Broad written description of study area’slandscape character, detailed descriptionof the visual landscape character of eachunit and graphics to illustrate thelandscape character descriptions andunits.

2. Map 1 - Landscape character units thatillustrates homogenous patterns ofvegetation, topography, waterform and landuse; as well as individual landscapefeatures, including natural, rural and builtelements. (Figures 2.6 - 2.9.)

Map the above characteristics to produce thebase map for your project area, at the appropriatelevel of application for your project (regional,local, site). The availability of existing detailedbase maps will depend on the site location andany previous studies that were conducted. Thismap is to be used as the base for maps insubsequent steps of the visual landscapeevaluation process.

Although most of the following steps are suited fordesktop analysis, fieldwork is essential to verify,validate and complement the desktop information(see Section 2.4).


1. Identify landscape character units.

2. Describe landscape character units.

3. Map landscape character units.

PART TWO


1. Identify landscape character units

Begin with a general analysis of the landscape ofthe entire study area; highlighting the majorlandform, vegetation, water form and land usecharacteristics.

The primary characteristic of a landscape may beits basic type of land categories or land use:natural, rural or built. This distinction may beparticularly relevant at a regional level.

All three types of land use may not apply to astudy area. For example, a large area can bedivided into natural, rural and built land usecategories, but in smaller projects the entire areamay be rural in character, but will still containnatural and built features.

Landscape character units generally comprisehomogenous patterns of characteristics such aslandform, vegetation, water form and land use aswell as individual features. Determine thecharacter units using the broad overviewdescription to start with, the homogenousgeographical patterns that are evident, and thebase map prepared in Step 1 may assist withdetermining boundaries.

2. Describe landscape character units

‘Reading the Remote: Landscape Characters ofWestern Australia’ (CALM et al 1994) providesdescriptive inventories of the varied and uniquelandscapes in Western Australia, and frames ofreference to assist in describing the landscape.

Focus on visual landscape character, whichrefers to the appearance of the basic landscapeelements; landform, vegetation, water bodies andhuman land use, that make an area identifiable orunique. A range of terms may be used. Thestandard visual descriptors in ‘Reading theRemote’ (1994) are form, line, colour, texture andscale. However, there is a wide range of suitable,non-emotive terms. The examples provided inTable 2 use as a guide, as not all terms areappropriate to every landscape. Modify thedescriptions where appropriate. Several other keyterms are stated and defined in Appendix 5:Glossary.

In conjunction with the description of the overallvisual character of the landscape study area, thelandscape character units can also be describedin terms of the basic land use categories: natural,rural and built characteristics. The next threesub-sections provide examples of how todescribe each of these categories. Figures 2.3 -2.5 and Table 3 provide examples of ways ofdescribing visual landscape character.

Scale Intimate Small Large Vast

Enclosure Tight Enclosed Open Expansive

Diversity Uniform Simple Diverse Complex

Texture Smooth Textured Rough Very rough

Form Vertical Sloping Rolling Horizontal

Line Straight Angular Curved Sinuous

Colour Monochrome Muted Colourful Garish

Balance Harmonious Balanced Discordant Chaotic

Movement Dead Still Calm Busy

Pattern Random Organised Regular Formal

Adapted from: Guidelines forLandscape and Visual ImpactAssessment (The Landscape Institute,1995).

Table 2: Examples of terminology for describingvisual aspects of landscape character

PART TWO


• Vegetation: height, patterns, predominantspecies type, density, colour, textures,understorey layers and percentage ofcanopy cover. Examples of individualvegetation features include variation inwoodland species, individual trees, andwildflowers patterns.

• Waterform: size, extent, depth, colour,common surface texture for example,rippled, flat or choppy, surf breaks, as wellas the edge characteristics of the waterbody eg embankment slope, line of thecoast or rock boulders that border awaterform. Linear forms include streamsand rivers. Open water bodies includelakes, estuaries and coastal waters.Examples of individual waterform featuresinclude: rock pools, waterfalls, rockseepages, fast-flowing stream, rapids orstill water pools.

• Soils and exposed rock (describe rockform and surface soil colour and texture).

Natural landscape character

Natural landscape characteristics remainpredominately unmodified. A natural area may belarge enough to warrant identification as a separatecharacter unit. Enclaves of cleared land may beincorporated in an area designated as a naturallandscape if the overall character remains natural.Individual natural elements such as landform(topography), water bodies and remnant nativevegetation may also occur in rural and builtlandscapes.

Describe natural character in terms of establishedvisual elements. Elements to consider may include:

• Landform (topography): ridgelines,escarpments, hills and valleys, Examples ofindividual landform features include rockoutcrops, boulders, sand dunes, naturalembankments and clearings, gorges, cliffsand limestone ridges.

Rock features that are prominent at a district level

Rock features that are prominent at a site level

Colour, form andtexture diversity of rock formations and vegetation visible atclose distances

Low coastal heathand scrub vegetationopen views

Straight line of slope to ocean broken by steep shoreline cliffs

Shoreline diversitycreated bycombination of sandy beaches and rockyshores

Figure 2.3: Natural landscape character.

PART TWO

• utilities (including powerlines, waterpipelines, wind turbines, mobile phonetowers);

• road patterns and character;

• roadside vegetation pattern, density andnaturalness;

• ephemeral features such as wildflowers,fauna, and water conditions; and

• individual features such as windmills,historic buildings, bridges, fences,livestock and landmarks that are perceivedas rural icons of cultural significance.


Rural landscape character

Describe rural characteristics in terms ofestablished visual elements. Elements to considermay include:

• agricultural crop patterns, colour andscale;

• plantation density and location, scale,colours, textures;

• remnant vegetation stands;

• individual remnant or exotic trees;

• presence of natural features such aslandform and valley slopes;

• location and rural character of farmhomesteads and associated buildings;

• settlement pattern of rural towns;

• land tenure and zoning;

• diversity in agricultural land uses;

• mining activities (eg quarries);

Remnant vegetation on ridge createsa natural backdrop to cultivated valley

Strong regimented pattern created byrows of fruit trees.Emphasisesundulating landformcharacter

Abrupt edge between cleared land and remnantbush

Figure 2.4: Rural landscape character.

PART TWO


Built landscape character

Describe built characteristics in terms ofestablished visual elements. Elements to considermay include:

• settlement patterns;

• land tenure and zoning;

• general road layout;

• streetscapes (general, parking,freeways, main streets, residential);

• buildings (general, residential, commercial,industrial, community, institutional,transport);

• pedestrian ways;

• trees in streets, gardens and parks

• public open space (vegetation andparks in built areas);

• open space (including semi-public andprivate areas);

Pattern of residential area is defined by roadgrid. Major roadsare orientated either parallel tothe coast or atright angles to it

Influence ofthe coast’sconfiguration is reflected in linearopen space,parking, tourist accommodation and coastal road alignment

Figure 2.5: Built landscape character

• colour and style of built forms;

• location and design of industry andcommercial areas (including ports); height,colour and siting of buildings, utility towers,power poles and lines; and

• individual features in a built area, such ashistoric buildings and features, landmarks,artworks, railway stations and other uniquebuilt structures.

PART TWO

3. Map landscape character units

After undertaking a broad analysis anddescription of the visual landscape character,divide the study area into character units for thepurpose of evaluation; and developing strategiesto manage and plan for each character unit.

Table 4 assists in the mapping of landscapecharacter units and individual featuresresponsible for the general landscape characterof an area. Landscape character mapsincorporate character units and prominentindividual features and landmarks that contributeto the overall character of an area. In some casesthe boundaries of character units may need to bearbitrary. This should be noted in the characterdescription.


Regional Describe the natural character of national parks, state forest, coastal reservesand areas of partially cleared or little used lands.

Describe rural character in terms of broad patterns of land use, tenure andsettlement.

For built landscapes, focus on broad aspects, such as large-scale naturalfeatures including hills, escarpments, rivers and large water bodies; and relatedlarge-scale patterns of urban form, regional parkland, transport corridors andranges of development densities.

Describe the natural character of large uncleared reserves, or unique landform.

Describe rural character using more detail about types of buildings or stands ofremnant vegetation.

For built landscapes, focus on smaller scale patterns and features as listedabove.

Local

Describe the natural character of areas of remnant vegetation, individual trees orrock outcrops.

Describe rural character using even more specific detail, such as type of fencingor species of wind break vegetation.

Focus on detailed streetscapes, site specific built elements and small-scaleopen space.

Site

Table 3: Examples of elements (natural, rural, built) that may be described at each scale ofapplication: regional, local and site

Prepare Map 1 - landscape character units,which illustrates homogenous patterns ofvegetation, topography, waterform and landuse; as well as individual landscapefeatures, including natural, rural and builtelements.

PART TWO


Figure 2.6: Excerpt from landscape character units map, Landscape Background Report (2006)prepared for the Lower Great Southern Regional Strategy (WAPC 2007) visual landscape evaluation,illustrating division of the landscape into overlapping categories comprising both physiographic unitsand categories that are based on land use.

Regional Using broad scale character units, map the landscape character divisions foundin Reading the Remote: Landscape Characters of Western Australia (CALM1994). Map the three land use categories where applicable: natural, rural, built(Figure 2.7).

The landscape character units mapped at a regional level may be subdividedinto smaller units at the local level. Map landscape features such as ridges,creek-lines, wetlands, rural hamlets and prominent individual buildingssuperimposed on landscape character units.

Local

Units from the local level should be further subdivided for application toindividual sites. Map specific individual landscape features such as tree stands,heath and scrub, small water bodies, rock outcrops and varied vegetationspecies. Note that at a site level character units may not be needed and/orappropriate. Description and determination of individual features may beadequate for mapping at a site level.

Site

Table 4: Examples of mapping landscape character units at the three scales of application

PART TWO


Figure 2.7: An example of regional landscape character units mapped at a state level (CALM et al 1994).

PART TWO


Figure 2.8: For visual landscape evaluation at a local level, landscape character units are divided intosmaller units, as in this example used in the Moresby Range Management Strategy (draft 1998).

PART TWO


Figure 2.9: Hypothetical illustration of landscape character units and features mapped at a site level.

Roadsidetrees createcanopy

Avenue ofexotic trees

Bridge

Dam

Rockfeature

Creekline withriverinevegetation

Rock featurewith heathvegetation

Vineyard

Major ridgelineMinor ridge

House onfootslope

A

BUpland unit

Valley unit

Individual features annotated. Includes landform, vegetation and land use features

AB

Visually distinctive vegetationprovides colour and contrast

Step 3: Evaluate the way the visuallandscape character is viewed,experienced and valued

• How is the landscape accessed andexperienced?

• What are the important views and whereare they seen from?

• What is the community’s attitude towardsthis landscape?

• What is it about this landscape’s featuresand views that are valued?

Outputs

1. Written inventories may be prepared for anyof the categories of mapped data to providedetail eg regarding key views (type, features,angle etc).

2. Written inventories for attributes and values

3. Graphics eg photos illustrating key viewsand examples of view locations such asdifferent types of roads

4. Map 2 – Viewing experience and values,containing viewing locations, key views,viewsheds, screening, preferred and/orvalued areas and individual landscapefeatures

Note: Map 2 contains a considerable amountof information in different categories. Themapping tips outlined in each section shouldassist in mapping the different categories.

PART TWO

• identifying key views; and

• determining visibility (viewsheds/seenarea).

Begin to prepare a map called Map 2 - viewingexperience and values, which illustrates eachpart of this step, including viewing locations, viewsignificance, key views, viewsheds (seen area ifapplicable), screening, preferred and/or valuedareas and individual landscape features.

Viewing locations and viewer experience

Identify and map view locations, including roads,recreation sites and residential areas usingAppendix 1 (Table 5), together with any writtennotations regarding the way in which peopleexperience a landscape. Table 5 divides thesecomponents into three levels of significance:national/state, regional, and local. All three levelsof significance in Table 5 will apply to travelroutes, individual sites and landscape areas.

The assumptions are that:

• some viewing locations, views, and areasvisible in views will be considered moreimportant than others by thoseexperiencing the landscape; and

• some viewers will be more aware of thelandscape and more concerned about itsappearance, depending on their reasonsfor being in the landscape.


Community preferences

It is desirable that stakeholders, including thegeneral community, are involved in Step 3, so thatthe results are more likely to be an accuratereflection of community experience andpreferences.

If the community has been directly consulted inrelation to preferred views, view locations, areas,and features, and has provided much material, orconflicting material, it may be desirable to createa separate, additional map that illustratescommunity input. This data would also need to beincorporated into Map 2, in summary form, whereappropriate.

There are two components to Step 3:

1. Evaluate how the visual landscape isaccessed, viewed and experienced.

2. Identify and assess what is valuedin the visual landscape.

Mapping tips: viewing locations and viewerexperience

• Use colour coding to indicate the level ofsignificance or value for each mappedview location (Levels 1, 2 or 3).

• Mark any other notations regarding viewerlocations and viewing experience that aremappable.

1. Evaluate how the visual landscape isaccessed, viewed and experienced

How a landscape is viewed is of criticalimportance in understanding changes in thelandscape and how people perceive them. Visuallandscapes are related to peoples’ sense of placeand quality of life. How people view, perceive,experience and interact with landscape can bevaried and diverse. However it is possible todocument viewing experiences and particularlywhat it is in the landscape that is valued,preferred or not preferred.

The principal components of this stage of theassessment are:

• identifying viewing locations;

• identifying who viewers are and how theyexperience the landscape (levels ofsignificance);

• describing how the viewers value thelandscape, and what their preferences are;

PART TWO


Table 6: Examples of viewing experiences at each scale of application

Note: categories viewed at local or site level may also have regional level importance.

Regional viewing experiences include views from main roads, settlements andmajor recreation sites of regional importance. Key regional views and viewshedsare generally those that receive intense community use and/or scrutiny.

Viewing experiences include views and viewsheds from minor roads, local walk-trails and lookouts, residences and businesses of local significance.

Site-specific viewing experiences include views and viewsheds at the detailedscale from local access roads, car parks, structures, picnic sites, lookout pointsand trails.

Regional

Local

Site

Image 7(a): Regionally significant view of the southern end of the Moresby Range, viewed fromGeraldton. The view in itself is not dramatic but its importance lies in its proximity to town.

Image 7(b): Part of a regionally significant view in the Chapman Valley (Mt Sommer).

Image 7(c): Panoramic views are generally obtained from elevated positions. Most viewpoints that areformally designated as lookouts provide panoramic views.

PART TWO


Image 10: Feature views are dominated by largelandscape elements, such as hills.

Image 11: A single feature that is small incomparison to the landscape in which it is situated,but nevertheless draws attention due to itscontrasting character may dominate a landmarkview. This example shows a lighthouse in a naturallandscape.

Image 8 and 9: Enclosed or canopied views may beexperienced along river or road corridors, andviewing locations may be developed as picnic sites,as they typically provide more shelter than sitesoffering panoramic views.

Views

Identify and map the views that peopleexperience. Landscapes provide both generalviewing experiences and specific key individualviews. For example, forested landscapes providemainly canopied and enclosed views, urbanlandscapes provide axial views down roads,elevated landscapes such as mountain rangesprovide panoramic views, coastal areas are likelyto provide open, unobstructed views. Describethe general character of views in theaccompanying text.

Provide an inventory and evaluation of view typesand observer view experience. Componentsinclude: location and direction of view, distancefrom observer to landscape features, travel routesand use areas, duration of view, type and extentof existing screening and characteristics of view.

Panoramic views are most frequently singledout as significant. However, a wide range ofview types typically make up the valuedviewing experience of a landscape egenclosed views in forested landscapes.

Key types of individual views may include:panoramic, canopied, enclosed, feature, focal,landmark and sequential views, as well as viewcorridors, or long vistas. Significant individualviews and viewsheds are often obtained fromelevated locations and provide extensive viewsor views of a distinctive feature. The type ofview depends on the relationship betweenlandscape character and the viewer’s positionin the landscape. Refer to Images 7 – 14 forillustrations of types of views.

Mapping tips: views

• Number key views to link with inventorytables.

• Map key views using a series of arrowsshowing their location and direction.

PART TWO


Images 12 and 13: Focal views occur where theviewer’s attention is drawn directly to a single portionof a view, for example, the view straight ahead wherea road bends or passes over a rise.

Figure 2.10: Excerpt from general viewing experience map, Landscape Background Report (2006)prepared for the Lower Great Southern Regional Strategy (WAPC 2007) visual landscape evaluation. Ata regional level it is generally sufficient to simply indicate major viewing locations.

Image 14: A series or sequence of varied views mayopen up to travellers using winding roads throughundulating terrain.

PART TWO

background (6.5 km – 16 km and beyond) (CALMVisual Landscape Management System 1989)1.

Screening by vegetation or buildings is notusually mapped as it may be removed (egclearing or burning of roadside vegetation).However, it should be mapped, or at leastdescribed in the text, if it is relevant for aparticular assessment because it affects viewerexperience by restricting viewing opportunities forroad users.

Mapping tips: visibility (seen area analysis)

• A detailed seen area analysis is notusually necessary in regional levelassessments.

• Indicate distance zones (visibility) bymapping the zones that are relevant to thestudy area (foreground, middle-ground orbackground).

• Accurate seen area mapping andviewshed analysis is more likely to berelevant for local and site levelassessments.

• Indicate areas of screening whererelevant (eg dense, moderate or sparseroadside vegetation).

• Methods for conducting viewshed and/orseen area analysis are described in detailin Section 2.4 – Tools and Techniques.

2. Identify and assess what is valued in thevisual landscape

Identify those areas, features and views that arevalued by the community using the generic list ofvisual landscape preference indicators (Appendix7). This has been developed using communitypreference research to identify criteria that arerelevant to community evaluation of landscapecharacter. If the expert needs to identifycommunity-valued features without directcommunity input, this list provides a starting point.


1 These are the distance zones used by the Department ofEnvironment and Conservation (Landscape and Recreation Unit).This manual promotes the same distance zones to maintainconsistency across agencies.

Visibility (viewsheds/seen area)

Landscape visibility can be defined in two ways:

• whether a feature and/or landscape can beseen or not; and

• how far away the feature and/or landscapeis from the observation point.

Where appropriate, identify and map viewsheds,or seen area, defined as the portion of thelandscape that can be seen from designatedobserver positions. The observer position directlyrelates to the landscape in terms of the visibility ofsignificant landscape areas, features and views.

For example, the viewshed of a road comprisesthe land visible from the road if vegetation andbuildings were removed. The extent of view isnormally limited by landform and distance.Screening is more important to note at a site orlocal level rather than a regional level. For moredetail on viewsheds (seen area) refer toSection 2.4.

Distance zones are used to measure visibility interms of distance from the observer to thelandscape. Distance can affect peoples’perception of the landscape area and featuresthey are viewing. Categories are determined bythe amount of colour and textural detail that isvisible. Textural detail represents the structure andsurface characteristics of the landscape andcolour provides contrast. Texture ranges from fineand smooth, to coarse and rough. When viewingthe same landscape surface, the texture willusually appear to be more coarse and rough inthe foreground and progressively finer andsmoother as distances increase to thebackground (CALM 1994:7). The same objectviewed from increasingly greater distances willoccupy a progressively smaller portion of theobservers’ field of vision. Refer to Figure 2.11 fora hypothetical illustration of distance zones.

The distance zones adopted by this methodologyare: foreground (from the viewer to 500 m);middle-ground (500 m to 6.5 km); and

PART TWO


Adapt the indicators to the study area by addingto the list or removing irrelevant features asnecessary.

Visual character preference indicators

A list of generic visual character preferenceindicators has been developed for visuallandscape evaluation in Western Australia,derived from desktop research and Readingthe Remote (CALM 1994). These characterindicators have been classified into twocomponents: criteria for most preferred visuallandscape character; and criteria for leastpreferred visual landscape character(Appendix 7).

This component of Step 3 is one that traditionallyhas generated the most debate, and the oldadage ‘beauty is in the eye of the beholder’ isoften quoted. People are attracted to landscapesof differing character ranging from natural, torural, to highly modified built landscapes. Factorsthat affect peoples’ preferences and responses tolandscape settings include personal sensitivities,age, education, experience, cultural backgroundand economic circumstances.

Determining how people experience and evaluatevisual landscapes is a complex task, but notimpossible. It is an important component of everyvisual landscape evaluation process. Determiningcommunity sentiment can be based on genericsocial research or assumptions, project areaknowledge, simple surveys, perception studies,personal interviews and workshop feedback.Values may also be implied by people’sbehaviour, such as use of lookouts and scenicroads.

Values or preferences refer to the value placed ona landscape or landscape feature by thecommunity, based primarily on its perceivedvisual quality.

Values and preferences are identified eitherdirectly by asking the community, or by usingthe generic list of community preferencesbased on research findings (Appendix 7).

The criteria used to assign values andpreferences to areas, views and features in alandscape need to be listed for each exercise,using this generic preference list and Table 6(levels of viewer significance) as a startingpoint.

6.5 km

6.5km

16.5km

500m

Foreground - viewer position to 500 m

Middleground - 500 m to 6.5 km from viewer position

Background - 6.5 km to 16 km from viewerposition and beyond where visible

Viewer position is the road network. Distance zones are applied regardless of actualvisibility, which may be affected by topography, vegetation or built structures

Road network

Figure 2.11: Hypothetical illustration of distance zones (not to scale).

PART TWO


Regional Valued landscapes may comprise an entire landscape character unit such as amountain range, valley system, forested unit or viticulture area or specific valuedfeatures such as major escarpments, rivers, waterfalls and historic settlements.Important views may include views from elevated hilltop lookouts, scenic roads,tourist walk trails, navigable rivers and inlets, entry points to regional settlementsor from major recreation and/or tourist sites.

The community may value large areas such as a national park, an escarpment orspecific landscape features such as individual hills, lakes, creeks or clusters ofhistoric buildings. Views from local lookouts and recreation sites may beconsidered important, in addition to views valued by the regional community.

Local

The primary emphasis is on valued individual landscape features such asindividual rock outcrops, stands of trees or buildings, and specific views.

Site

Note: there will be areas and elements identified in each level of application that the community might find unattractive or incompatiblewith desired visual character of the study area.

Ideally the community would have direct input intothis stage of the evaluation by identifying areas,features and views that are highly valued,assisted by use of the generic checklist. Modifythe generic list of indicators (Appendix 7) toreflect the perceptions of their local communityand relevant stakeholders. Remove irrelevantcharacter indicators, modify criteria and add otherrelevant character indicators where necessary.Appendix 1 (Table 5), which shows the levels ofsignificance for viewing and/or viewersexperience, needs to be utilised in the same way,by eliminating what is irrelevant to the evaluation.

If community input is not feasible, identify areasand features in the study area that are likely to bevalued more highly by the community, using thegeneric checklist and Table 5, together with otherindications available, such as letters printed inlocal newspapers. The method used to obtaindata on community experiences and valuesneeds to be clearly documented.

Map visual character preferences on Map 2.Revise the viewing experience and valuesillustrated on the map when and if stakeholdersare consulted.

Mapping tips: preferred areas and features

• Highlight separately the valued areas,views and features identified directly by thecommunity to distinguish them from areasidentified by expert analysis based on thegeneric visual character preferenceindicators (Appendix 7) and Appendix 1(Table 5) (levels of significance).

• In compiling the maps, additional fieldworkmay be necessary to confirm or testsuggestions made by the community,especially with direction and identificationof significant views.

Identify any specific landscape issues

A wide range of land uses currently impact on thevisual character and integrity of WesternAustralian landscapes. These include ruralsubdivisions, plantations, utilities including windfarms, roads, mining and extractive industries.Identification, discussion and assessment of theseissues should progress through each stage of theassessment process. Each development projector proposal will be different.

Specific guidelines to help planners andmanagers deal effectively with the visual impactsof particular land use issues are presented in

Table 7: Examples of landscape features that may exist in landscapes that are highly valuedby the community for their visual character

PART TWO

Identify and describe specific landscape issuesthat concern stakeholders, including thecommunity, or may affect efficient land useplanning, so they can be addressed in specificstrategies and guidelines.


Part 3 of this manual. The guidelines for each ofthese topics will include techniques to help locateand design these types of developments so as tominimise the extent to which they detract fromvalued landscapes, landscape characteristicsand views.

Figure 2.12: Community identification of major views, preferred rural landscapes (red) andnatural landscapes (green), least preferred landscape features (purple). Excerpt from 2002community workshop mapping for the Landscape Background Report (2006) prepared for theLower Great Southern Regional Strategy (WAPC 2007).

PART TWO


3. Stakeholder input where possible.

4. Map 3 – visual landscape strategieswhich are an overlay of Maps 1 and 2illustrating mappable objectives andstrategies for each landscape characterunit, as well as specific landscape issues.


1. Composite mapping technique.

2. Develop broad visual managementobjectives and strategies for eachlandscape character unit.

3. Develop strategies to address specificlandscape issues.

Stakeholder input should be obtained in relationto the objectives and strategies determined forthe management of the study area. An integrateddocument listing all objectives and strategies withexplanatory statements may be referred tostakeholders, using the most effective,

Step 4: Develop strategies formanaging visual landscapecharacter

• What are the appropriate visualmanagement objectives for eachlandscape character unit; and how canthey be achieved?

• What are the appropriate strategies toaddress the visual management objectivesfor each character unit?

• What are the strategies to address anyspecific landscape issues that have beenidentified?

Outputs

1. Documentation of all visual managementobjectives and strategies for eachcharacter unit of the study area.

2. Prioritise and review objectives andstrategies for implementation.

Figure 2.13: Excerpt from community perceptions map, Landscape Background Report (2006) preparedfor the Lower Great Southern Regional Strategy (WAPC 2007): visual landscape evaluation, illustratingmost preferred and least preferred identified by the community advisory group.

PART TWO


appropriate and cost effective techniquesavailable. For example: workshops, newsletters,neighbourhood meetings, newspapers orpersonal discussions.

1. Composite mapping technique(Figure 2.2)

Map 1 should display the landscape characterunits as determined in Steps 1 and 2.

Map 2 should appear with key views; viewerexperience and significance preferred and/or notpreferred areas and features (Step 3).

Overlays (composite mapping)

Composite technique to achieve the outcomes ofthe visual landscape evaluation:

• Overlay Map 1 (character units) with Map 2(assessment of areas and features), tovisually display landscape areas and/orfeatures for management of visuallandscape character for each characterunit (Step 4).

• The tools and techniques used to overlaythis information can be varied. There is thetraditional method of superimposing onemap over another, or using computergenerated techniques (Section 2.4).

• Drawing from all documentation,consultation and all other informationcollected during the evaluation process,

the investigator should have someindication of additional annotations andmappable strategies that are required to beillustrated on the overlay of Map 1 andMap 2.

• Once the overlay is complete, the mapshould illustrate areas and features in eachcharacter unit, that require strategies toprotect and maintain areas of valuedcharacter, or restore and enhance areasthat are degraded. This resultant map isMap 3: Visual landscape strategies.

The result is the identification of exact areas in oracross landscape character units that requirestrategies for management.

2. Develop broad visual managementobjectives and strategies for eachlandscape character unit

Use the composite mapping technique{landscape character units (Map 1) and generalviewing experience and values (Map 2)} as abasis for identifying appropriate managementobjectives and strategies. Begin to prepare Map 3- Visual landscape strategies, which illustrateseach part of this step; those being objectivesapplied to each character unit, mappablestrategies and identified specific landscapeissues (see Table 8 for examples of specificlandscape issues).

Regional Issues may include changing patterns of land use, such as establishment oflarge-scale plantations, large-scale trends in vegetation clearing and/orrevegetation, urbanisation of outer metropolitan areas, intensified settlement ofrural areas, intensified agricultural use, ports and associated industrial estatesand large-scale open cut mining operations.

Issues may include roadside vegetation clearing, rezoning of land uses in localtown planning schemes, siting and design of a major facility such as a windfarm, timber mill, resort or harbour, new subdivision in a prominent location orprotection of a primary viewshed or viewing experience.

Local

Issues may include establishment of a community park, removal of street trees,and siting and design of individual buildings, signage and street sculpture.

Site

Note: landscape issues often overlap into all scales of application, such as wind farm developments that may have an impact on thelandscape and have implications at regional, local and site-specific levels.

Table 8: Examples of landscape issues at each scale of application

PART TWO


Image 15: Within a landscape area, such as thisarea west of the Moresby Ranges, may displayindividual features that require either protection orrestoration. The remainder ‘bulk’ of the landscapeshould adopt best practice siting and designstrategies.

The areas, features, view locations and key viewpoints that have a high priority for managementwill be clear and apparent once the compositeoverlay technique is complete. As well asmapping, describe these areas in detail in writtendocumentation. Any other descriptions anddocumentation from Step 3 will assist theinvestigator in determining the appropriatemanagement strategies to undertake in the studyarea.

Identify broad visual management objectivesand strategies for managing visual characterfor each of the landscape character units. Thevisual management objectives adopted by thismanual comprise:

(i) best practice siting and design: thisshould be a baseline objectivethroughout; and should be undertakenfor the entire study site;

(ii) protection and maintenance of visuallandscape character; and

(iii) restoration of degraded character orenhancement of opportunities, forexample, for viewing.

(i) Best practice siting and design

This objective applies to all areas of thelandscape under study. First and foremost alllandscape components should be managed withthis objective. Part 3: Guidelines for location,siting and design provides practical siting anddesign guidelines for an extensive range of landuses in Western Australia.

The majority of many landscapes is likely to fallinto this broad category, defined as landscapeareas in which existing character will be taken intoaccount, but not necessarily maintained in itsexisting form.

Examples of strategies to meet thisobjective

• Employ best practice planning and designprocesses.

• Protect, enhance or restore individuallandscape components or features thatrequire attention.

• Retain dominant existing visual landscapecharacteristics.

• Apply practical and sensitive siting anddesign guidelines for different land usesand particular landscape types (Part 3).

• Develop strategies to address specificlandscape issues for the study area.

(ii) Protection and Maintenance

This objective can be defined as maximumprotection and maintenance of existing visuallandscape character. Any alterations to the visuallandscape character assigned to this objectiveshould be planned and designed to have minimalvisual impact. This objective is likely to apply toareas that have high value and significance forplanning and management.


• Development applications and/or plansmust demonstrate a clear understanding ofthe importance and implications thatproposed changes would have on areas orfeatures requiring protection andmaintenance.

PART TWO


• Any alterations to the existing visuallandscape character in these areas shouldbe planned and designed to have minimalvisual impact, in which development wouldtypically either be not evident or blend withits landscape setting.

• All features and views should beconsidered with the aim of retaining theestablished character as much as possiblein response to changes to the landscape. Itis unlikely to be acceptable fordevelopment proposals to be prominent.

• Designate and manage scenic travel routesto the highest standard.

• Protect valued view types.

• Use planting to retain focus views.

• Use local regulations, controls andenforcement to protect views.

• Minimise roadside clearing.

• Protect canopied views.

Some examples of natural landscape characterthat may require protection and maintenance at aregional level could include; coastlines, waterfeatures, dense forest, individual mountain peaksand hills. Examples at a local or site level mayinclude individual hills, local rivers, individualdistinctive vegetation communities and smallwater bodies.

Some examples of rural landscape character thatmay require protection and maintenance at aregional level may include; areas with a significantproportion of remnant vegetation, individualremnant trees, rural characteristics such asvineyards and orchards, and the presence ofwater. Some examples at a local or site level mayinclude rock outcrops, historic rural structures orwatercourses and lakes.

Some examples of built landscape character thatmay require protection and maintenance at aregional level could include residential precincts,historic precincts and natural features in (andbackdrop to) urban areas. Examples at a local or

site level may include individual buildings,gardens or parklands or groups of heritagebuildings (commercial or residential).

Note: these areas and features are examples onlyand can vary significantly from one project to another.

Note: the number and complexity of appropriatestrategies will depend on the specific area underassessment. Refer to Appendix 2 for acomprehensive list of existing planning mechanismsthat can assist in the application of landscapeprotection strategies.

Image 16: Dramatic coastal terrain is a priority forprotection.

Image 17: The Moresby Range has been the subjectof a planning strategy aimed at protecting thisvalued rural landscape.

Image 18: Residents often express a desire toprotect the character of leafy urban neighbourhoods.

PART TWO


• Use of signage to enhance the use ofviewing locations and lookouts.

• Use roadside clearing to create enhancedview experience.

• Enhance feature or focal views wherepossible.

Some examples of natural landscape characterthat may require restoration and enhancementinclude statements on the following topics at aregional level: areas affected by salinity, naturalforests affected by dieback, quarries that exist innatural areas, areas that are rezoned to futureurban. Examples at a local or site level includestatements on the following topics: clearing ofnatural vegetation for prominent firebreaks,extensive diseased vegetation, areas cleared forpower easements, extensive roadside vegetationclearing.

Some examples of rural landscape character thatmay require restoration and enhancement includestatements on the following topics at a regionallevel: landscapes dominated by one type of landuse, prominent rural residential areas and broadareas of salinity. Examples at a local or site levelinclude statements on the following topics:diseased vegetation, saline patches, uniformwindbreak planting and obtrusively sited homes.

Some examples of built landscape character thatmay require restoration and enhancement includestatements on the following topics at a regionallevel: industrial areas, areas of suburban sprawl,ribbon development and some areas ofcommercial development. Examples at a local orsite level include statements on the followingtopics: expansive car parks, streetscapes with novegetation, overhead powerlines, junkyards andland fill sites.

Development applications and/or enhancementplans must demonstrate a clear understanding ofthe importance and implications of proposedplans or activities upon landscape characterunits, areas and features requiring restoration andenhancement.

(iii) Restoration and/or enhancement

This objective can be defined as restoration andenhancement of degraded visual landscapecharacter. Areas in which this objective wouldapply comprise visually degraded sites orfeatures that require rehabilitation, orenhancement to improve the visual character ofthe landscape. Enhancement may also refer toopportunities to improve viewing experience (egadditional lookout points). This objective wouldalso apply to landscape character units thatrequire high priority for management, given theneed for restoration and/or enhancement of theexisting visual landscape character.

Existing and/or proposed developments may helpre-establish the characteristics of the landscapethat are valued by the community througheffective assessment and management ofproposed changes.


• Borrow from the existing natural characterin the visual landscape and help restoredegraded landscapes wherever possible toplan any potential changes to thelandscape.

• Use a new feature to enhance a landscapethat is currently lacking visual interest. Itmay be acceptable for new development tobe prominent in the landscape.

• Restore or enhance an existingdevelopment so that it blends with thesurrounding visual landscape, or is notevident in the landscape.

• Create and enhance view opportunities,such as roadside lookouts and viewcorridors through vegetation stands.

• Develop new roads and or walk-trails toimprove accessibility.

• Restore and enhance established travelroutes.

• Use planting to screen visually degradedviews.

PART TWO


3. Develop strategies to meet specificlandscape issues

Identify and describe strategies that take intoaccount the valued characteristics, viewingexperience and pressures that were identified inStep 3 of the visual landscape evaluation.

Strategies should provide specific direction andaction steps in response to issues identified bythe stakeholders. Identify these on Map 3 Visuallandscape strategies if possible.

Tips

• Initial sources can include the local mediaand field investigations.

• Determination of key issues will evolve fromconsulting stakeholders, includinglandowners, residents and relevant stateand local government agencies.

• Community members could be offered aforum for feedback, verification anddiscussion.

• Specific landscape issues can be validatedby discussion with community members.

Developing strategies for managingspecific viewing experiences

Address individual viewing experiences, suchas those available to users of major travelroutes. Some routes may require restoration egurban highways with strip commercialdevelopment, while others have potential forenhancement of opportunities, such asincreased number of viewpoints along scenicroutes. These may pass through a number ofcharacter units, and therefore be more readilyaddressed separately.

Landscapes vary in their ability to maintainexisting valued characteristics as some aremore sensitive to change than others. Theconcept of landscape capability, or sensitivity,is discussed further under the heading ‘visualabsorption capacity’, in Section 2.4.

Image 19: Clear-felled or dieback infested forestadjacent to a highway is an example of a naturallandscape where restoration and enhancementwould be an appropriate visual landscapemanagement objective.

Image 20 and 21: Rural landscapes may requirerestoration and enhancement, as in this quarry in theMoresby Ranges and dead karris at Torbay.

Image 22: This urban area of light industry onCockburn Rd could be redeveloped as a visualmanagement objective for restoration andenhancement.

PART TWO


Figure 2.14: Example of a site level visual landscape strategy map, with recommendations groupedaccording to relative prominence of portions of the site.

Source: Excerpt from Figure 7, Leighton Marshalling Yards Regional Planning Guidelines – Assessment of Views, Vistas andLandscape Character (Ministry for Planning, 2000). Courtesy of Thompson Palmer Pty Ltd.

PART TWO

Mapping Tips for Step 4

• Any strategies that cannot be mapped canbe illustrated as annotations, strategicnotes or comments on Map 3.

• Categorise features, areas and viewsaccording to the relevant strategies (forexample roads to be designated asscenic).

• Map specific landscape issues on Map 3by annotating and/or categorising eitherlocations where issues are focussed, orlocations that comprise examples of whereissues occur.

• Additional overlays can be used wheredesirable. For example strategies can beoverlayed onto any other resource map, ifthe assessor needs to establish wherepriority areas for management are locatedin relation to landscape character units orland categories (natural, rural, built).

• Additional overlays can provide a clearindication of those landscape characterunits or land categories that may requiremore strategic management than others.


Image 23: Plantations may block important viewssuch as this glimpse of Pemberton from the highway.

Figure 2.15: Landscape management strategies map, from Landscape Background Report (2006)prepared for the Lower Great Southern Regional Strategy (WAPC 2007): visual landscape evaluation,illustrating how recommendations may be presented as annotations on a map.

PART TWO


Step 5: Implementation of strategiesinto planning outcomes

Once the visual character objectives andstrategies have been identified, documented andmapped, a list of actions and priorities forplanning can be prepared. This prepares theoutcomes of the visual landscape evaluation forincorporation into significant planning documentsand processes that influence planning directionand decisions.

Implementation and integration into planningoutcomes requires the use of the tools andpolicies outlined in Part 1 and Appendices 2, 3and 4.

Priorities need to be determined for each projectassessment in terms of time lines, budgets andother constraints.

Appendix 2 outlines the planning mechanismsthat exist in the planning system to integrateassessments into decision-making. Appendix 3outlines policy measures under which this manualoperates. Appendix 4 gives clear guidance onthe roles of the assessor, different agencies, localauthorities and developers in the visual landscapeevaluation process. Community consultationtechniques are discussed here.

2.3. Visual impact assessment

Visual landscape evaluation enables goals anddirections for landscape protection to beincorporated in regional and local strategies. Thisin turn enables criteria and rules to be included inregion and local planning schemes. Throughvisual impact assessment during the normalassessment of a development application theproposal can be measured against these rules.

The visual impacts of a proposed developmentare described, analysed and evaluated in thevisual impact assessment process. Measures arealso identified to minimise the potential impacts.

Visual impact assessments are undertaken mainlyat the local and site level, but may be required atthe regional level. Some examples are providedbelow.

A visual impact assessment may be required toaccompany a development application. It will beprepared by a proponent and be undertaken byexternal consultants or specialist internal staff. Atthe project design stage the findings of the visualimpact assessment can be used to optimisevisual impacts.

If a visual landscape evaluation has not beenmade, and if visual landscape criteria and ruleshave not been included in the local planningscheme, requirements and conditions relating tothe visual landscape should be confined tomatters already provided for in the scheme.

The following steps outline the basic procedurefor undertaking a visual impact assessment at anylevel. The level of detail at which each step iscarried out will vary for each assessment,depending on such factors as the complexity ofthe proposed development and resourcesavailable, including data, expertise and budgetconsiderations.

PART TWO

Many techniques referred to in the following stepsare explained further in Section 2.4: Tools andtechniques for visual assessments.

Visual impact assessment steps

Step 1 Determine visual managementobjectives.

Step 2 Describe proposed development.

Step 3 Describe the potential visualimpacts.

Step 4 Develop visual managementmeasures.

Step 5 Prepare final recommendations.

Step 1. Describe existing visuallandscape character anddetermine objectives for managingvisual landscape character

The visual impact assessment process is used toassess the impacts of specific developmentproposals while visual landscape evaluation formsthe context or background for the visual impactassessment. The visual landscape evaluationprovides the visual management objectivesagainst which to measure potential visualimpacts.

Determine and describe the visual landscapecharacter objective for the proposed site. A visuallandscape evaluation undertaken at the regional,local or site level will provide the baseline dataagainst which changes can be assessed.

• If a visual landscape evaluation hasalready been completed, all that will beneeded is some fine-tuning and additionaldetailing. If the assessment is not available,


Regional Proposals that may require a visual impact assessment include:

• major land use projects such as plantations, wind farms, or large scaleclearing;

• developments that have large-scale impacts such as a new port facility orhighly visible development located on a regionally significant site(eg quarry on an escarpment adjacent to an urban area);

• projects with incremental or indirect impacts in which large-scale changesresult from a number of small individual changes over time (eg clearing foragriculture); and

• large scale tourist resorts.

Proposals that may require a visual impact assessment include any of thedevelopments listed for the regional level. Specific examples could include ruralresidential development, urban subdivisions, new roads or a wind farm.

Local

Nearly all proposals require a visual impact assessment at a site level inresponse to proposals for development on individual sites, such as subdivisions,buildings and public recreation facilities. Site level impacts may havesignificance at a local or regional level (eg wind farms).

Site

Note: at a regional scale, concerns such as economic considerations generally outweigh visual landscape character and other socialconcerns. However, there is usually scope to reduce visual impacts at a regional level through careful siting and design.

Table 9: Examples of visual impact assessments undertaken at each planning level

PART TWO


Step 2. Describe the proposeddevelopment

• Analyse, describe and illustrate the mainvisual components of the proposeddevelopment, particularly elements likely tobe visible such as buildings, roads, parkingareas, utilities, signage, fencing, firebreaks,contouring, clearing and landscape works.

• Develop and illustrate several developmentoptions.

• Prepare plans showing locations and theextent of major visual features. Includecross-sections and elevations of buildingsand other major structures, showing keydimensions such as height, colours andproposed materials.

• Include a projected time-line describingchanges to a proposed development overa period of time such as phases in aquarrying operation if necessary.

• Illustrations, drawings or simulations of theproposed development should be realisticand comprehensive. They should be basedon actual photography with proposedchanges superimposed by hand artwork orcomputer simulation.

this step should be done as part of thevisual impact assessment. An abbreviatedversion may be appropriate depending onthe scale of the proposed impact.

• Summarise the objectives in tabular form,including annotated maps andphotographs as required, identifying thelocation of any priority areas or sites.

Figure 2.16: This figure from a Kwinana waste site proposal illustrates how a landform analysis could begraphically presented. Adapted from image supplied by Ecoscape Australia Pty Ltd.

30 year growth

Note:Colours on structure indicate stage of growth only. The constructed tipsite will be covered by screening vegetation.

Screening vegetation not shown in these images - refer to proposed structureviews 1-7.

20 year growth25 year growth 0-15 year growth

PART TWO


• Describe the general type of views thatmay result from the development such asnew feature views, removal of canopiedor enclosed views, screening ofpanoramic views.

• Identify and describe likely changes tothe visual landscape character and viewsthroughout the staging of the project, withparticular reference to the different stagesof development operations.

• Document the findings in tabular form,with annotated maps and photographs asrequired, identifying the location of anypriority areas or sites.

(ii) Evaluate likely changes and/or impactsof each development option

• Assess the magnitude, duration andsignificance of each specific visualimpact. In other words, how extensive isthe impact likely to be, how long will itlast and how important will it be? Theimpacts over time need to be considered,at agreed time periods after construction,and at specific stages in on-goingdevelopments such as quarry operations.

Step 3. Describe and evaluate thepotential visual impacts

(i) Identify and describe likely changes tovisual landscape character and views

• List likely changes in landscapecharacter for each development option,based on the outcome of Step 2.Annotated maps and three-dimensionalmaterials indicating particular impactsshould be provided. Refer to the visuallandscape character assessmentdescribed in Step 1.

• Identify the extent of the area likely to beaffected by the development (eg visibility,seen area analysis, viewshedidentification).

• Identify key views that may be affectedby the proposal, including views that areimportant at regional and local levels andassess changes to views.

• Identify the main views to and from thedevelopment. Where will the developmentbe seen from and how will it look fromthese viewpoints?

Present view View with structure

Structure with vegetation

Note:Line represents height of RL40

Figure 2.17: This simulated view of a proposed Kwinana waste site provides an indication of how theproposed development would look from this important view location on Patterson Road. Adapted fromimage supplied by Ecoscape Australia Pty Ltd.

PART TWO


An example of a change that wouldcreate substantial impact would be aproposal that would result in notable, longterm landscape changes in a highlyvalued landscape which cannot readilyabsorb the proposed changes, such as aquarry on a prominent scarp face.

A change that would cause minimalimpact would be a proposal that wouldresult in imperceptible changes in alandscape that is not highly valued by thecommunity, for example an extension ofan industrial facility within an industrialestate.

Document the findings in tabular form,annotated maps and photographs asrequired, identifying the location of anypriority areas or sites.

• Assess the capacity of the landscape toaccommodate the proposeddevelopment options without altering itsvalued visual landscape characteristics.How sensitive is the landscape to theproposed development type? Determinewhether the proposed developmentwould introduce a totally new element tothe landscape or simply retain what isalready there. (Refer to ‘visual absorptioncapacity’ in Section 2.4).

The growth of any vegetation screeningneeds to be taken into account (Step 3).Establish how much natural screeningexists in the landscape and whether thesite is capable of sustaining morescreening.

• Determine if an impact will be temporaryor permanent and whether the effect willbe beneficial, neutral or adverse.

The concept of the uniqueness or rarity ofthe affected landscapes, features andviews may be relevant. This will assist indeveloping strategies to addressimpacts.

To determine the significance of potentialimpacts, develop a set of criteria relevantto each development option beingproposed. Individual impacts on projectsettings can be placed along acontinuum ranging from minimal tosignificant. Take into account themagnitude of projected impacts onlandscape characteristics and views thatare valued by the community.

Significance can be determined byconsidering both magnitude of impactsand likely community sensitivity or degreeof concern about the impacts.

PART TWO


1. Part of the tipsite structure will be formed below ground by backfilling lot 434, which is currently being excavated. While lot 434is being backfilled, the rest of the site including the perimeter oflot 434 will be vegetated to provide visual screening.

2. The planting will be done in a series of layers sothat vegetation will have established at the base ofthe structure by the time the next layer is built.

3. Each new layer of planting will begin with theconstruction of the perimeter bund. This bundwill be covered in topsoil and mulch and thenvegetated to create a screen to the tipsite activities.

4. Vegetation will continue to be planted on the structure as every new perimeter bund is built while the older vegetation will continue to develop.

5. Once complete the top of the structure will becovered in vegetation to blend in with the

surrounding landscape.

RL62

RL25

58 m

Northern elevation

Perimeter bund walls

Tipsite benches

Area below groundArea below groundArea below groundGround level

Figure 2.18: Simulated view of proposed waste site at Kwinana, showing stages over time. Adaptedfrom image supplied by Ecoscape Australia Pty Ltd.

PART TWO


Figure 2.19: Planting that would be established to screen proposed waste site at Kwinana. Adaptedfrom an image supplied by Ecoscape Australia Pty Ltd.

Stage 1Tuarts and Jarrah planted around the base of the structure.Smaller trees planted along new bunds.

Stage 2Tuarts and Jarrah will have grown to provide cover.Small trees and tall shrubs grown along base of hill.

Stage 3Small shrubs and heath like plants are grown to cover the majority of the structure.

Tall - Medium tree speciesSmall trees

Tall - Medium tree speciesSmall treesSmall shrubsSmall shrubs - Heath plants

Tall - Medium tree species

PART TWO

Step 4. Develop visual managementmeasures

(i) Determine whether visual managementobjectives can be achieved

• Determine whether or not the developmentoption chosen meets the relevant visuallandscape character objectives establishedin Step 1.

• The visual landscape character objectivesderived in Step 1 are likely to be verybroad and may not provide adequateguidance at a site level. In this case, amore detailed evaluation may be required.The general focus should be on identifyingand preserving or enhancing significantareas, features and views.

(ii) Identify measures that reduce negativeimpacts; and facilitate positive impacts

• If the proposal does not meet theestablished objectives, identify anddescribe measures to reduce negativeimpacts (ie develop recommendations toavoid or reduce negative impacts orchange them into positive impacts). Anintegral part of all assessments ofdevelopment proposals is the mitigation orreduction of negative impacts.

• Analyse individual components ofdevelopment options to determine thesource of predicted negative impacts.Tailor specific measures to address theseimpacts, based on best practice siting anddesign principles. Measures should alsoaddress each stage of a stageddevelopment.

• Endeavour to meet all visual characterobjectives and recommendations throughcareful siting, planning and design. Identifyand avoid serious constraints early in thedesign process.


500 m 1000 m 1500 m 2000 m WestEast

Cockburn Roadre-alignment

Hamilton Road/EntranceRoad intersection

City of Cockburn offices

34 m27 m

12 m9 m

Sightlines from City of Cockburn offices and Hamilton Road/Entrance Road intersection to skyline and top of hypothetical 8m building.

Proposed alterations to ground levels as part of Port Coogee development.

Hypothetical 8 m building on west side of re-aligned Cockburn Road.

Height of vegetation required to screen view of hypothetical 8 m building from Counciloffices, if planted immediately east of re-aligned Cockburn Road - ~6 m.

Key

Port Coogee

Figure 2.20: One of the visual management objectives for the proposed development at Port Coogeewas that the development not be visible from east of the ridge. Cross-sections such as the one abovewere prepared to enable planners to determine whether this objective could be met by vegetationscreening located in the ridge top open space or in the road reserve.

Source: Based on cross-sections of proposed development, by Sinclair Knight Merz, in Port Coogee Waterways EnvironmentalManagement Plan. Volume 5 Landscape Management Plan (RPS Bowman Bishaw Gorham, 2004).

PART TWO

Implementation

Once the final recommendations for the visualimpact assessment of the development havebeen completed and documented, a list ofactions and priorities for planning applicationscan be prepared. This includes presentingalternative development options if applicable. Theoutcomes of the visual impact assessment canthen be incorporated into the planning decision-making and approvals process.

Implementation and integration into planningoutcomes requires the use of the tools andpolicies outlined in Part 1, Appendices 2, 3and 4.

Priorities need to be determined for each projectassessment in terms of time lines, budgets andother constraints.


Step 5. Prepare the finalrecommendations and monitoringoptions

• Summarise the findings of the assessmentand identify the significant impacts in termsof location, design details or other visuallandscape issues that are associated withthe proposed development (eg protection,visual intrusion, loss of privacy).

• Compare and discuss development optionsand determine the extent to which visualmanagement objectives for the site wouldbe met.

• Identify and describe any mitigationmeasures or design principles that shouldbe applied (including recommendeddevelopment and performance conditionsand monitoring).

• Produce the final recommendations, tablesand charts for analysis and presentation.Visibility mapping and graphics depictingthe proposed development are centralcomponents.

• Recommendations regardingimplementation need to address thepossibility of monitoring, in particular anyconditions that have been placed on thedevelopment proposal during the approvalprocess.

PART TWO

2.4 Tools and techniques forvisual landscapeplanning

Introduction

There are a number of tools and techniques thatcan assist the visual landscape planner.

The principal aim of any technique used in visuallandscape evaluation and/or visual impactassessment is to provide objective informationthat is tailored to the particular project needs. Themost appropriate techniques will vary accordingto a specific project, community sentiment, scaleof area being assessed, available resources,landscape issues to be addressed, expectedoutcomes and numerous other variables such aspolitical, cultural and environmental factors.

The techniques and tips below may apply toeither or both visual landscape evaluation andvisual impact assessment, although the focus ison techniques for visual impact assessment.

Photography

Photographs are an important technique in visuallandscape planning. Aerial photographs inparticular can help illustrate and documentestablished visual characteristics, land usepatterns and user patterns. Three-dimensionalimages enable visualisation of an existing orproposed development and can assist decision-makers in assessing proposals and makinginformed decisions. Photos are useful in manyforms of communication: questionnaires, personalinterviews, brochures, posters, on the internet,public workshops, newsletters and other printmedia.

Photographs can help illustrate visualcharacteristics of landscape character units.During application stages, photos can be used tofine-tune development proposals and addressdesign objectives.


The importance of focal length

Photographs can misrepresent the visuallandscape. A long focal length (zooming in) canmake distant objects seem relatively larger, and ingeneral compresses the view. A short focal length(wide angle) makes distant objects appearrelatively smaller and less evident.

It is important to record the focal length at whichphotographs are taken. With a 35 mm camera, afocal length of about 90 mm best represents whatthe eye sees. A sequence of such photographs,assembled into a montage, is required to bestrepresent a panoramic view, rather than a wide-angle view.

Tips for use of photography in visuallandscape evaluation

• Aerial photographs can form a useful basefor landscape character mapping,especially at a local or site level. Satelliteimages may assist in regional levelassessments.

• Photos should be taken from travel routesand use areas from which the proposeddevelopment will be most visible.

• Photo positions should be decided withinput from key stakeholders and themembers of the community whose viewswill be affected.

• Photograph locations and conditions mustbe carefully chosen and well documented.

• An index map indicating photo locationsshould be prepared.

• Photographs should be taken from anormal human viewing height and angle,for example, from eye level on a road orroadside rather than from the top ofroadside banks or from the roof of avehicle.

PART TWO


Figure 2.21: Air photo overlaid with annotations indicating locations from which ground levelphotographs were taken, with angle brackets showing direction and width of views.

Source: Figure 2, Leighton Marshalling Yards Regional Planning Guidelines – Assessment of Views, Vistas and Landscape Character(Ministry for Planning, 2000). Courtesy of Thompson Palmer Pty Ltd.

PART TWO


Field investigations

Most of the techniques described in previoussections apply to desktop data analysis. Fieldinvestigations are essential to verify, validate andcomplement the desktop information.

Important aspects to note in the field include:general types of views available, majorviewpoints, descriptions of landscape charactercomponents such as type of trees that areprominent in the visual landscape, obviouslandscape issues, the character of buildings andother man-made structures, significant roadsidevegetation, the nature of small-scale features suchas rock outcrops or stands of trees. Roadsidevegetation screening may also be noted. Table 10provides an example of what a record sheet forlandscape assessment fieldwork may look like.

In local and site level studies it is useful to useaerial photographs and binoculars to identify thelocation of specific landscape features that maybe the subject of recommendations for protectionor enhancement, such as remnant trees onprominent ridgelines or along creek-lines orquarry sites.

• The exact location and height should bemapped and documented, together withcompass directions and details about thecamera lens used.

• To best represent the view seen by thehuman eye, panoramic views should be amontage of photographs taken with a longfocal length rather than with a wide anglelens.

• The date, time of day and weatherconditions such as shadows, glare,reflections and colour intensity should benoted, as they can influence visualqualities.

• The focal length (or degree of zoom/wideangle) should be recorded for eachphotograph.

• Identifiable reference points should beincluded in the image to enable accuratepositioning of overlays depicting aproposed development.

Photos used in visual impact assessments can beoverlaid with annotations that explain the keypoints of the analysis and label major features ofthe proposed development.

Field Survey Record Sheet

Viewpoint No: Location: Date: Landscape Condition

Film/Photo No: Direction of view:

Annotated Sketch: Most appropriate management strategy

Protection

Restoration

Brief description (main elements and features)Best Practice Siting and Design

Dominant landscape Ability toelements accommodate change

Table 10: An example of a field survey record sheet(adapted from Landscape Institute 1995:39)

PART TWO

creates a three-dimensional simulation by drapingaerial photography over terrain (contour) data, aswell as other layers of information such asvegetation, proposed development plans andsettlement areas. It allows the investigator tovisualise the potential impacts a proposeddevelopment could have on an area with variousgeographical and land use elements, from anarray of viewpoints that are digitised.

Sim Urban is software which creates a real-timesimulation of urban environments with highlyrealistic facades and surfaces, allowing veryprecise assessments of the visual impact ofchanges to the built environment.

Sketches and artists impressions

Sketches can illustrate a number of elements in alandscape simultaneously in a hypothetical scenebeing prepared for a visual landscape characterdescription. However, the resulting image maylook unrealistic if these features are not normallylocated in the same area.


Simulations and computergenerated techniques

Computer simulations can generatephotomontage images that are useful whenassessing proposals that produce changes to thevisual landscape. Simulated images can be avaluable tool to help people visualise a proposeddevelopment. However they can also bedeceptive. To be effective simulations mustaccurately portray true scale, perspective,observer position, angle of view, colour, texture,angle of the sun and distance from the observer.

One of the most difficult tasks is accuratelydepicting the depth of colour of proposedobjects, taking into account the weather and timeof day. Although computer techniques cangenerate a large amount of information veryquickly, manual techniques can also be effective.

There are a whole new generation of computersimulation techniques that have evolved over thecourse of producing this manual. One example isvisualisation software called SKYLINE, which

(a) Simulation view of project for EPA assessment in July 2002

(b) Updated simulation view of project (May 2003), with new cooling tower configuration

Figure 2.22: Photo simulations may illustrate alternative development proposals, allowing comparison, asin this proposed plant on the Burrup Peninsular. Image supplied by URS, courtesy of Dampier Nitrogen.

PART TWO

Seen area or viewshed analysis

Seen area or viewshed is defined as the landvisible from a point or series of points, such asfrom a lookout tower, road or river (see Figure2.24).

The most basic form of seen area analysisidentifies an area of landscape that would bevisible assuming that it had no vegetation coveror built structures, based on landform alone andnot taking into account potential screening.


Annotations written on photographs or sketchesare a useful way of communicating key findings ofthe visual landscape assessment.

An artist’s impression is another way of producinga hypothetical image of a landscape andproposed development. This may be an easierway to produce an image that incorporates theproposed changes into an existing landscape, interms of depth of colour and reflections. It is likelyto be less accurate than a computer generatedsimulation in depicting the exact location anddimensions of a development. An effective imagecan be created by using computer technology toindicate the dimensions of structures, accuratelylocated in a photo of a scene, and rendered byhand to create a realistic final appearance.

Composite techniques

Regardless of the technique used, it is importantto illustrate all components of a developmentproposal including ancillary elements that mayinclude fencing, powerlines, other utilities, roads,structures, vegetation removal, drainage worksand all planting.

Images may be needed to illustrate projections ofhow a development will appear over time; growthof plantations or screen plantings for example.These could assist in monitoring progress once adevelopment is completed.

Oblique aerial perspective

Overlaying aerial photographs and digitalelevation models creates three-dimensionalimages. Other data layers, including cadastral,land use, roads, hydrology or vegetation covercan be added if required.

Three-dimensional images are useful wherelandform screening and the relationship betweenlandform and other landscape components areparticularly important. They should supplementground level information that represents normallyaccessible views of the landscape.

Figure 2.23: Oblique aerial photo used to illustrateposition of major ridge crest through developmentsite.

Source: Figure 1, Port Coogee Marina Waterways EnvironmentalManagement Plan. Volume 5: Landscape Management Plan. (2004).Image supplied by Sinclair Knight Merz, courtesy of RPS BowmanBishaw Gorham.

Outlying portion of viewshedeg distant hilltop

View points at reguView points at regular intervals along a rointervals along a roadView points at regular intervals along a road

� � � � ��

�

�

Figure 2.24: Hypothetical viewshed from a road,comprising combined viewsheds from viewpoints atregular intervals along the road.

PART TWO


Visual impact assessment

Two applications of viewshed analysis are relevantfor visual impact assessment exercises.

First, the landscape seen from major publicviewing locations should be identified. Thevisibility of a proposed development from thesemajor viewer positions should be identified,assessed and mapped.

Second, viewsheds should be assessed from thepoint of view of a proposed development itself.The purpose should be to identify all locationsfrom which the development will be visible(Figure 2.25). The analysis should also identifylocations from which only part of a development isvisible such as the top of an industrial chimney orblades of a wind turbine rather than the wholestructure.

Identification of all locations from which adevelopment will be visible is vital if the visibilityof a proposed development is to be minimised.Alternative development locations or designs canthen be tested and assessed.

Cross-sections

Cross-sections are vertical profiles through aportion of landscape. They help illustrate thetypical relationship between landform and otherlandscape characteristics such as vegetationcover and land use.

Vertical scale is usually exaggerated to highlightspecific features. Cross-sections can be drawn byhand using a contour map or produced bycomputer simulation using digitised contourinformation.

Cross-sections can help determine the visibility ofa proposed development, particularly a verticalfeature such as a building or wind turbine. Theycan also be used to determine height limits forbuildings and other structures, and the requiredheight of vegetation screening. Cross-sections are

Screening may be taken into account by fieldinvestigation or computer analysis.

Amalgamating a series of viewsheds fromindividual points at regular intervals along theroute identifies the composite viewshed of a linearfeature such as a road or river.

In this way, a series of individual viewsheds iscombined into a single viewshed. The intervalused on a route through flat terrain would begreater than that used for undulating terrain (egevery kilometre versus every 100 m), and thescale of analysis should also be taken intoaccount. Viewsheds may contain land that is notcontiguous, for example, isolated distant hilltopsor ridges.

Visual landscape evaluation

For a visual landscape evaluation of a region, adetailed seen area analysis of the entire region isnot usually necessary. Instead, the majorlocations from which the public sees thelandscape may be identified. These include majorroads, scenic routes, towns, recreation sites andwalk-trails. Accurate seen area mapping isrelevant for a local or site level assessment aswell.

A seen area analysis is undertaken using acomputer program designed for the task. Theaccuracy of the mapping output depends on thecontour data available. The smaller the contourinterval used, the more accurate the seen areamapping will be.

At a local or site level seen area mapping can beundertaken using field inspection and handdrawing to produce additional seen area mapsthat take account of screening by vegetation orbuildings.

PART TWO


Figure 2.25: Hypothetical viewshed from a single viewpoint. Accurate viewsheds are generated frommultiple terrain cross-sections and can be used to identify exact portions of land that comprise sensitivelocations, such as the skyline and foreground ridgelines.

Middle groundskyline

Distant skyline

A

B

C D

Intermediateridgeline

View from point A

A

B

C

D

Land thatcomprises skyline

Outlying portionof viewshed

Intermediateridgeline

AB

C

Actual ridgelinenot visible from point A

Skylinefrom point A

Intermediate ridgeline

Map of area seen from point A(Point A’s viewshed)

Cross-section AC indicating land that is visible from point A

AD

Cross-section AD indicating land that is visible from point A.Sightline illustrates that land beyond point D is not visible.

PART TWO


Figure 2.26: Seen area analysis - air photo overlaid with area seen from key viewing locations,illustrating the relative prominence of various portions of the site. Terrain cross-sections from eachviewing location would indicate the height at which structures would be visible in the areas wherethe ground surface is not currently visible.

Source: Figure 5, Leighton Marshalling Yards Regional Planning Guidelines – Assessment of Views, Vistas and LandscapeCharacter (Ministry for Planning, 2000). Courtesy of Thompson Palmer Pty Ltd.

PART TWO


that affect capability include the extent to whichthe landscape is generally visible, eg dependingon the screening provided by landform andvegetation; and a landscape’s potential forincreased screening, eg whether the terrain cansupport planted screening vegetation that fits withthe existing character of the landscape.

Visual absorption capacity analysis can beapplied as a highly technical process. Stepsinclude identification of the criteria that arerelevant to the area being investigated, such ascriteria related to landform units, soil types,vegetation communities and land use types. Anassessment is made of characteristics that areconsidered to be the most and least likely tovisually absorb proposed changes withoutaltering landscape character. Relevant informationis overlaid to create a composite map ofcapability levels.

There are similarities between the visualabsorption capacity concept, and land capabilityanalysis, in which an area’s capacity to sustain aparticular type of land use is analysed. Similarly,the visual absorption capacity concept relates tothe landscape’s ability to absorb a particular typeof change.

Analysis of visual absorption capacity is morecommon as part of a visual impact exercise thana landscape assessment, although considerationof the visual absorption capacity of a broaderlandscape may assist in the development ofrecommendations to protect valued landscapes.

The visual absorption capacity concept has beenused in the USA and Australia. A similar concept,called landscape capacity has been developed inEngland and Scotland (Scottish Natural Heritageand Countryside Agency: Topic Paper 6, 2004).

generally undertaken for site level analysis. Theyare useful when illustrating special features of asite and in developing alternative design options.

Landscape data mapping

Maps depicting specific landscape elements canbe used to help understand the uniquecharacteristics of a landscape character unit.Elements of interest may include; elevation andlandform features, road hierarchy, water bodies,plant communities, remnant vegetation, salinitypatterns, vegetation patterns resulting fromclearing, fire, revegetation and plantations,satellite images highlighting ground coverage andland use.

Detailed data maps could assist in identificationof major landscape issues and/or formulation ofdevelopment recommendations. Maps couldinclude: town planning schemes, land managedby the Department for Conservation and LandManagement, other reserves, land tenure andland subject to heritage inventories.

Base maps used should be accurate, current, ofan appropriate scale, and should includesufficient labels of significant features to enablecross-reference between written texts andmapped data. Any specific features mentioned inthe text should be located on a map.

Visual absorption capacity analysis

Visual absorption capacity is a term applied to theability of a landscape to be changed and stillretain its existing visual characteristics, such asnatural, rural or built character, sense of scale,degree of complexity, degree of enclosure,dominant patterns, forms, lines, colours and thelike.

Some of these characteristics may lendthemselves to a particular type of change morereadily than others, eg a more enclosed ordiverse landscape may accept change moreeasily than one that is open in character. Factors

PART TWO


3.1 Introduction 65• the purpose and scope of Part 3

• how to use these guidelines

• assessing development proposals

• broad visual management objectives

• specific visual managementobjectives

3.2 Valued landscapes under pressure 71• coastal landscapes

• riverine and estuarine landscapes

• prominent elevated landscapes

• undulating rural landscapes

3.3 Guidelines for particular land uses 87• urban uses

• rural uses (protection of valuedcharacter, rural residential,plantations)

• utility towers (wind farms,telecommunications, transmissionlines)

• mining and industry

PART THREE -Guidelines for Location,Siting and Design


How to use these guidelines

Refer to Section 3.2 Valued landscapes underpressure if you are involved in planning forcoastal, riverine, undulating rural or prominentelevated areas. Issues to consider are provided,as well as general principles and more specificguidance.

Refer to Section 3.3 for specific land usecategories such as rural uses or urban uses fordiscussion of broad issues and generic principlesfor addressing these. These guidelines should beused in conjunction with existing policies andguidelines as outlined in each section.

Refer to the Utility towers guideline for detailedguidance for the development of wind farms.Material on some uses, such astelecommunications towers, is quite detailed inrelation to addressing visual impacts. Thisguidance complements broader ranging adviceavailable from other sources.

Refer to the Mining and Industry guideline forgeneric principles and guidance for this land use.

The guidelines are intended primarily forapplication to private land. Areas that are inpublic ownership, such as national parks, arealready subject to comprehensive managementplanning.

Assessing development proposals

Part 2 of this manual includes a detailed outline ofa process for assessing the visual impacts ofdevelopment proposals, for use by those decisionmakers who are responsible for recommendingthe acceptance or otherwise of specificdevelopment proposals.

The outcome of this visual impact assessmentprocess should be a recommendation that basedonly on visual impacts, the proposeddevelopment should be accepted as proposed,accepted with modifications or rejected. This

3.1 IntroductionPart 3 is intended to:

• provide advice for local communities andlocal and state agencies on techniques toprotect valued visual landscape character,including individual features and views;

• assist development proponents to produceproposals that are compatible with visuallandscape character;

• assist those planners and decision-makerswho are responsible for assessing thepotential impacts of developmentproposals, for example, in developingapproval conditions;

• provide a starting point for local authoritiesin establishing localised guidelines andpolicies; and

• help communities to address issues thatimpact on landscape values.

There is a wide range of documented criteria thatare relevant to location, siting and design ofdevelopment, such as land capability,groundwater protection, vegetation conservation,energy conservation through solar aspect and fireprotection. This manual focuses on the visualcomponents of development and changes in landuse. Methods for addressing visual criteria forsiting and design of development are not welldocumented, are often contentious and have notpreviously been comprehensively addressed inWestern Australia.

Ideally the consideration of visual landscapeissues would be integrated into any detailedguidelines for specific types of land use, as hasoccurred in the case of telecommunicationsguidelines that address a range of issuesincluding visual landscape. Separate,complementary guidelines that address visuallandscape in more detail are still warrantedbecause broader based guidelines usuallyaddress visual management in a cursory manner,and more guidance is needed on how toimplement policies that relate to specific landuses.

PART THREE


Specific visual management objectives

In order to meet these very broad objectives,strategies that meet more specific objectivesneed to be used. These specific objectives are:

(a) not evident: development may be hidden,screened or not visible, from specifiedviewing locations;

(b) blending: development may be evident,but generally not prominent in that itborrows from the existing landscapesetting;

(c) prominent: development may be adominant feature in the landscape, drawingattention to itself.

These three objectives outlined below areintended for application to the broad objectivesdefined in previously: protection andmaintenance; restoration and enhancement; andbest practice siting and design. A specificobjective may be relevant either due to the natureof the existing visual landscape character (forexample, the objective ‘not evident’ may apply todevelopment in a pristine natural landscape) ordue to community preferences for proposed landuse types to remain hidden from view.

If the broad objective is to protect and maintain alandscape, feature or view, it is most likely that thepreferred specific objective would be for adevelopment to either be ‘not evident’ or to ‘blend’with its visual landscape setting. Prominentlandmark developments would be acceptable ifthey are iconic and provide a complementarymeaning to the highly valued landscape.

Where the broad objective is for a landscape tobe enhanced or restored, any of the three specificobjectives may apply. It is more likely to beacceptable for development to be prominent inthe landscape, as a new feature to enhance alandscape that is currently lacking in visualinterest. Restoration or enhancement may involvestrategies to make an existing development blendbetter, or even to be made not evident in thevisual landscape.

advice then needs to be integrated withassessment of other factors, such as impact onconservation values.

However the focus in Part 3 is not on assessing adevelopment proposal, but on producing adevelopment proposal that is likely to meet thevisual management objectives that were decidedon as part of a visual landscape evaluation. Thisprocess should involve a series of repeated stepsin which the proposal is refined until it meetsagreed objectives.

Part 3 of this manual also assists in identifyingmeasures to address the potential negativeimpacts and constraints related to developmentproposals, and to facilitate positive impacts andopportunities. Development proposals shouldmeet visual character objectives through carefulsiting, planning and design. Serious constraintsshould be identified and avoided early in thedesign process, by undertaking a visual impactassessment.

Broad visual management objectives

The visual landscape evaluation method outlinedin Part 2 (section 2.2, Step 4) refers to threebroad, basic visual character objectives:

• protection and maintenance of visuallandscape character;

• restoration and enhancement ofdegraded visual landscape character, oropportunities for enhancement; and

• for other areas the broad objective is toundertake a combination of protection andenhancement where appropriate; andelsewhere to undertake best practicesiting and design.

PART THREE


Examples of the application of this specificobjective to particular types of land uses andforms of developments could include:

• land uses associated with solid and liquidwaste disposal, scrap yards, quarrying ormining;

• waste facilities at all levels, includinglandfill sites, waste treatment depots,sewerage facilities, and rubbish binenclosures;

• some forms of industry;

• telecommunications and other utilitystructures in valued natural landscapes,urban heritage areas or mounted on aheritage building (Utility towers guideline);and

• areas of open space that retain their naturalcharacter.

The broad objective ‘best practice siting anddesign’ applies to areas that may comprise acombination of areas requiring protection orenhancement, as well as any other areas that donot warrant particular attention, but neverthelessshould be planned and designed to meet currentbest practice for siting and design. Any three ofthe specific visual management objectives maybe applicable.

Examples for possible strategies for location,siting and design to achieve each specific visualmanagement objective are in Appendix 9.Thought starters for guidance on deciding onlocation, siting and detailed design are presentedin Appendix 10.

(a) Not evident

The broad visual management objective thatwould provide the context for this specificobjective would be ‘protection and maintenance’.

Development that is to be ‘not evident’ should notbe visible from designated viewing locations suchas roads, trails, residences or recreation areas.The degree to which development is evident willrelate to its distance from viewers, its magnitude,height and bulk, atmospheric conditions andcommunity attitude towards the form of land useproposed.

The ‘not evident’ objective would frequently applyto valued natural landscapes, where the broadobjective would be to protect and maintainexisting character. It would apply less often inrural landscapes and would often be irrelevant inurban settings, other than in areas of open spacethat retain their natural character.

Image 24: The Bunker Bay Resort is located out ofsight below the ridge in this highly valued view fromthe Cape Naturaliste lighthouse.

Image 25: Aquaculture development at Bremer Baylocated in a swale behind the foredune where it isnot visible from the beach.

PART THREE


for change. It may be chosen as an objective ininstances when it would actually be preferable fora development to be not evident, but for certainreasons it may be inappropriate or not feasible toimplement changes to ensure that development isnot visible.

This objective is typically referred to in planningdocuments including town planning schemes,conditions of development approval andenvironmental assessments. Measuring thesuccess or otherwise of this objective is moresubjective than measuring whether adevelopment is not evident. For this reasonmeasures for blending development into itslandscape setting should be included whereverfeasible, for example, building heights to bestructured below ridgelines and linking theproposed heights to the heights of nearby trees.

(b) Blending

The term ‘blending’ was chosen for this specificvisual management objective as it is commonlyused in reference to development that is visible(or possibly prominent) however its appearanceremains compatible with the surroundinglandscape setting. Other terms that are oftenused synonymously include ‘harmonise with’,‘complement’ or ‘borrow from’.

To ensure that a development blends with existinglandscape character, it is vital that the dominantvisual components of the landscape areidentified. Planners and designers need to knowwhich landscape characteristics the developmentneeds to blend with.

The ‘blending’ objective may be relevant innatural, rural or urban landscapes, particularlyvalued landscapes that are subject to pressures

Image 27: This simple timber structure at Red Bluff,north of Carnarvon, is not evident from a distancedue to the similarity between its colours and texturesand those of the surrounding landscape.

Image 28: The colours of this ecotourismaccommodation, and its siting amongst thevegetation that is taller than its roof, ensure that itblends well with its natural landscape setting.

Image 26: Transmission lines visible from CoogeeBeach: an example of a land use that ideally wouldbe not evident as seen from this popular recreationsite.

Image 29: This walkway at Canal Rocks, Yallingup,blends with its setting as the colour of the timbermatches that of the rock base and natural stone hasbeen used for foundations.

PART THREE

Image 32: View from the lighthouse towards the point at The Blowholes, Carnarvon Coast, Ningaloo.

Case study: The Blowholes, Carnarvon Coast,Ningaloo (refer to Appendix 8)

In this open coastal landscape it is not feasiblefor development to be ‘not evident’, although itis appropriate to attempt to blend developmentinto its landscape setting and to undertakeactions designed to enhance the site. Naturallandscape features should be maintained assuch, with development sited and designed tominimise visual impacts.

Visual management objectives that are specificto individual key views include the followingstrategies that relate to views from thelighthouse:

• it would be preferable not to havestructures silhouetted against the oceanand where this is not feasible, roofsshould fit with the strong horizontal line ofthe top of primary dune ridge;


• no structures should appear silhouettedagainst either the island or rocky shoreadjacent to the blowholes as visible fromhere;

• care will need to be taken if the newroad crosses the foredune in a linebetween the island and this viewpoint,as the island is a prominent landscapefeature in this view; and

• formal pedestrian trails should bealigned in a less intrusive fashion, that is,following contours, and greater usemade of swales.

Image 30: Prominently sited buildings mayincorporate colour schemes that reflect their location,as in this club facility at Trigg.

Image 31: The Ecology Centre at Bold Park, CityBeach, sits well against its vegetated backdrop.

PART THREE


(c) Prominent

There are many cases in which development isunintentionally prominent, however this objectiverefers to instances in which development isintended to comprise a new focus in a landscape,such as iconic community buildings or structures.Development still typically exhibits a connection toits setting, however, through colour, form orarchitectural style. An example is Cottesloe’sIndiana Teahouse with its colour, texture andsimilarities to historic structures that previouslyoccupied the site.

Some forms of development, such as lighthouses,are required to be prominent. These uses mayhave strong cultural landscape linkages orimportant reasons why they need to be featured inthe landscape.

In natural or rural landscapes, communities mayaccept the visual prominence of developments ifthey believe the benefits of the developmentoutweigh adverse visual impacts, such as windfarms. However, prominent development wouldgenerally be considered inappropriate in a highlyvalued natural landscape.

In urban areas it may be quite common for astructure to be intended as a prominent feature,especially where the original or valued landscapecharacter has been removed, as in Perth’s CBD.

Examples of urban prominent structures include:

• civic buildings such as concert halls,museums, art galleries, train stations, townhalls, seats of state or local government;

• city centre high-rise buildings;

• bridges;

• churches; and

• public sculptures or memorials.

Image 33: This building at Busselton jetty isprominent due to its location however its colour andform link it to the natural and cultural elements of itssetting: the coastal landscape and historic jetty.

Image 34: Cottesloe’s Indiana Tea House sitsprominently behind the beach but it is set well intothe slope and its colours, materials and overalldesign are visually appropriate it its setting.

Image 35: Lighthouses, like this one at CapeNaturaliste, may be prominent cultural features in anotherwise natural setting.

PART THREE


Image 36: Public sculptures are generally intendedto be prominent, even in natural settings, as in thisexample at Cottesloe. Use of local materialsprovides a visual link to the landscape.

Image 37: As in this City Beach kiosk, bold coloursthat contrast with the surrounding landscape may beused. These colours may reflect a culturalconnection, such as popular beach culture.

Image 38: Prominent structures are sometimestreated as an artist’s canvas, acknowledging theirprominence while still maintaining a link to thesetting, as at this Greenough caravan park.

3.2 Valued landscapesunder pressure

Introduction

This guideline addresses major visual planningand management issues that occur in some WAlandscapes which are both valued by thecommunity and are under pressure for change.These are: coastal landscape, riverine andestuarine landscapes, prominent elevatedlandscapes and undulating rural landscapes. Thelandscapes discussed here were selected on thebasis of anecdotal evidence of communityconcern, reflected in government policies such asDepartment for Planning and Infrastructure (DPI)State Planning Policies that focus on sensitiveareas including the State’s coastline and coastalareas, the Swan and Canning rivers and theLeeuwin-Naturaliste Ridge.

This manual provides examples of principles andstrategies for addressing the major visualplanning and management issues that areoccurring in these landscape types. Ifcomprehensive guidelines for any specificlandscape are required, the methods forassessing visual landscape character (outlined inPart 2 of this manual) may be followed. The outputof a visual landscape character assessment couldcomprise a set of siting and design guidelinesrelevant to a particular locality.

A number of natural landscapes or landscapefeatures in WA, such as the gorges of the northand several mountain ranges, are not addressedin this guideline. Their significance has beenrecognised by their status as national parks, andas such these areas are subject tocomprehensive management planning, in whichvisual management is addressed. They are notsubject to major development pressures.

The intent and structure of this guideline differsfrom the other land use guidelines outlined inPart 3. Guidance applies to sensitive landscapetypes, rather than specific land uses. The

PART THREE

Riverine and estuarine landscapes

Agencies - Swan River Trust (SRT), DEC, DPI,local authorities, estuarine management agenciesExisting policies/guidelines:

• Swan-Canning River System State PlanningPolicy Number 2.10 (WAPC 2006)

• Water Resources State Planning PolicyNumber 2.9 (WAPC 2006)

• Swan River Trust Policy SRT/EA1 –Conservation, land use and landscapeprotection (2002)

• Swan River Trust: Riverview 24: Protectingthe Swan River Landscape (2001)

• The Swan and Canning Rivers PrecinctPlan Handbook (SRT and WAPC 2002)

• Water notes 16 (W&RC 2001)

• Swan River System Landscape Description(SRT 1997)

• Local planning strategies

Prominent elevated landscapes

Agencies - DEC, DPI, local authoritiesExisting policies/guidelines:

• DEC management plans relevant toelevated landscapes

• Darling Scarp Regional Park andLandscape Study (DPUD 1993)

• Draft Moresby Range ManagementStrategy (WAPC 1998)

• Local planning scheme provisions(development control areas),


Undulating rural landscapes

Agencies - DPI, Agwest, local authoritiesExisting policies/guidelines

• Agricultural and Land Use Planning StatePlanning Policy 2.5 (WAPC 2002)

• Historic Heritage Conservation StatePlanning Policy (WAPC 2007)

strategies are not detailed; however this guidelinewill assist users in recognising these visualelements of these landscapes that may be underpressure.

Key relevant agencies and existingpolicies and/or strategies

This guideline should be used in conjunction withexisting policies and guidelines.

Coastal landscapes

Agencies - DPI, DEC, local authoritiesExisting policies/guidelines:

• State Coastal Planning Policy 2.6 (WAPC2003)

• Amendment to State Coastal PlanningPolicy (WAPC 2006)

• Coastal Planning and Management Manual(WAPC 2003)

• Perth Coastal Planning Strategy:Community Engagement Outcomes Report(WAPC 2006)

• Ningaloo Coast State Planning Policy 6.3(WAPC 2004)

• Leeuwin-Naturaliste Ridge State PlanningPolicy 6.1 (WAPC 1998)

• Ningaloo Coast Regional Coast StrategyCarnarvon to Exmouth (WAPC 2004)

• Shire of Busselton Adopted SchemePlanning Policy (Town Planning Scheme20) Combined Methodologies 413 SmithsBeach Road, Yallingup - Schedule 10,pursuant to Clause 103 2004)

• DEC management plans

• Coastal strategies and foreshoremanagement plans



PART THREE


• Leeuwin-Naturaliste Ridge State PlanningPolicy 6.1 (WAPC 1998)

• Shire of Busselton Caves Road VisualManagement Policy (1999)

• Avon Arc Sub Regional Strategy (WAPC2001)

• Lower Great Southern Regional Strategy(WAPC 2007)

• Local planning scheme provisions(development control areas)


Coastal landscapes

Guidelines for addressing coastal landscapes inWestern Australia are to be published separately,in a more comprehensive format. The materialbelow comprises a summary version.

Background

Coastal landscapes are probably more highlyvalued by the community than any other broadtype of landscape in the State. A 2005 communitysurvey conducted for the Perth coastal planningstrategy found that the coast was the most likelyplace that residents would take visitors, especiallyat sunset. The survey also found that 77 per centof respondents thought the coast is a major partof the character of Perth and 82 per cent thoughtthat it was very or quite important that the coastoffers ‘a place to experience the naturalenvironment’. Cottesloe was the location mostfrequently identified as a place that shoulddefinitely keep its existing character.

In relation to non-urban areas the public appearsto prefer an undeveloped coastline. For example,the Shark Bay World Heritage PropertyLandscape Study (CALM, 2001) found that theplaces visitors thought were the most attractivewere natural and the least attractive were human-modified. This finding was consistent with a largebody of international research into people’sperceptions of landscapes.

The coast is subject to enormous pressures fordevelopment, especially residential and touristdevelopments, including marinas, as well as portfacilities and coast-dependent industrialdevelopment. Due to the open nature of coastallandscapes, it is very difficult to locatedevelopment along the coast without it dominatingthe landscape, thus altering the coast’s naturalcharacter.

Visual elements

All coastal landscapes have the same two basiccomponents, land and sea, with a boundary zoneor edge between the two. The widely contrastingcolours, textures, forms and lines between landand sea create an enormous visual diversity andinterest.

Individual prominent coastal landform featuresinclude headlands, which are particularly visiblelocations as they are visible from along beachesfronting embayments. Other features include cliffs,beaches and dunes, as well as offshore features

Image 39: Sugarloaf Rock, Shire of Busselton, is aprominent rock feature in a natural coastallandscape.

Image 40: Colour and texture diversity on a rockybeach.

PART THREE


Visual elements specific to coastal tourismdevelopments to consider are siting and locationof development, building design (colours,materials, height, reflectivity), parking areas,signage and entry statements, access from mainroads and clearing of vegetation for development.

Issues and pressures

The community is particularly observant ofchanges to the natural character of coastallandscapes, especially in areas that are well usedand admired. Potential changes to the characterof coastal landscapes must be carefully assessedin terms of levels of impact that are acceptable tothe community, taking into account the characterof the site, the extent and type of use the sitereceives, and likely community sensitivity tochanges. Major visual issues on coastlinesinclude:

• modification of landforms and removal ofvegetation for urban expansion;

• reduced visual access to the ocean as thenumber and height of coastal buildingsincreases;

• visual dominance of built elements in urbancoastal landscapes;

• the wide variety of architectural styles,materials, heights and colours, which canresult in an overall lack of visual coherence;

• visual dominance of built elements innatural or rural coastal landscapes, eg:isolated tourist or housing developmentnodes; and

• the need for careful siting and design ofrecreation facilities such as ablution blocksand car parks, given the prominence ofcoastal recreation reserves.

The principal issues identified in the 2005community survey conducted for the PerthCoastal Planning Strategy comprised:

• high rise development;

• sprawl north and south along the coast;

• too many people living right on the coast;

such as islands and reefs. Coastal vegetation isgenerally low-growing, fragile, difficult to establishunless the species naturally grow on the coast,and prone to wind-pruning. Soils commonlycomprise infertile sand, or may be of a shallowdepth over bedrock, on rocky coastline. Littlenatural screening is provided because coastalvegetation is typically low and open. There is littlepotential to provide new vegetation screening, asconditions are exposed and soils infertile. Naturallandform screening is provided by swales in dunesystems.

The coast is a particularly fragile and dynamiclandscape, with constantly shifting shoreline andbeaches, mobile dunes and steep, eroding cliffs.Natural landforms vary widely in their character,from mudflats, beaches, estuaries and inlets, todune systems, headlands, cliffs and marinefeatures such as reefs. Vegetation communitiescontain a vast diversity of species, notably incoastal heath and scrub communities.

Coastal landscapes provide a wide diversity oftypes of views. Long, unobstructed views may beobtained along straight or gently curved stretchesof coast, or back towards the coastline from theocean. High points such as headlands, cliffs andthe tops of dune ridges provide panoramiccoastal vistas. Views may be enclosed in smallembayments, as at Rottnest, or views may bedominated by such features as cliffs, headlands,beaches or detailed close up features includingindividual plants, rock formations, shells or marinelife on beaches or under water, and underwaterrock features.

Image 41: Cottesloe groyne is a unique vantagepoint along Perth’s urbanised coast as it providesviews back to the beach from nearshore waters aswell as views along the coastline.

PART THREE


Natural and rural coastal landscapes

It is assumed that the community would prefer theexisting character of natural and rural coastallandscapes to remain visually dominant. Coastaldevelopment should be contained in existingareas and nodes, or other areas identified inendorsed regional planning strategies.

In natural and rural coastal settings strategies theaim should be to create a more natural and lessformal appearance than in urban areas.

Built elements should be in locations that are:

• in less sensitive landscapes;

• less visible;

• able to be screened from view by planting;and

• where they can be sited and designed in away that minimises their visual dominance.

• damage to the coast caused by too manypeople using the area; and

• impact of traffic and parking.

Principles and guidelines

This guideline focuses on visual landscapemanagement issues, complementing the recentlypublished Coastal Planning and ManagementManual (WAPC 2003), which covers a broaderrange of topics. It is also intended to assist localauthorities to implement the State CoastalPlanning Policy 2.6 (WAPC 2003).

Principles related to visual landscapemanagement in any landscape may be applicableat regional, local or site levels, while specificguidelines mainly relate to detailed planning anddesign at a local or site level.

Urban coastal landscapes

Locate, site and design built elements near thecoast in a way that minimises their visualdominance and acknowledges their coastalsetting.

Retain green belts that incorporate coastallandscape features such as headlands, dunesystems, coastal wetlands and waterways, andremnant coastal vegetation. These areas of openspace can link the coast to inland naturallandscape features such as rivers, ridges, ranges,estuaries or wetlands.

Image 42: The degradation of native vegetationdownslope from this coastal carpark has reducedthe visual diversity of vegetation. A few weedspecies now dominate an area which would havepreviously supported a myriad of native species.

Image 43: South of Scarborough, a wide dunesystem separates the coast from West CoastHighway and residential areas.

Image 44: This beach shelter on the North-WestCape exhibits an appropriate casual style.

PART THREE


and appearance of development. Detailedassessment may result in the conclusion that aproposed development would have possiblevisual impacts and would require modifications.

Some visual planning and management principlesto guide tourism and/or housing developmentproposals in coastal areas:

• avoid prominent sites such as elevatedpositions, coastal headlands, sites visiblefrom recreation areas such as beaches;

• incorporate local natural building materialsand colours that exist in the locallandscape setting;

• reduce the mass and scale of buildings bydeveloping a number of smaller buildingsinstead of a single larger one;

• screen by using local vegetation specieswhere possible; and

• use setbacks and buffer strips along roads,although these need to be based onapplication of principles regarding visibilityand screening available rather thanarbitrary measures.

Natural landform and vegetation in coastalurban areas

Buildings may visually dominate the coastline,particularly in nodes of more intensive use.However, where feasible the character of thenatural landform and vegetation should beacknowledged in the design of buildings,infrastructure and plant selection, such as in thechoice of materials and colour.

The general contours of the landscape should beretained where feasible, rather than wholehousing estates being levelled for buildingpurposes.

Individual natural landform elements, such asprominent dunes and ridges, steep terrain,headlands, rock outcrops, river and creekcorridors, should be retained. These features canbe incorporated into open space or larger sizedlots. Planning higher density development in lessvisually prominent parts of the estate may offsetcosts to developers.

Plant communities or individual plants ofecological, visual or cultural significance shouldbe retained where feasible. Examples includecommunities that are visually diverse, unique ortypical of the area.

Tourist or housing nodes in natural or ruralcoastal landscapes

Proposals for tourist and/or housing developmentsset in natural coastal landscapes that are highlyvalued by the community often generate muchpublic debate. If government authorities considerthat a location may be suitable for some form ofdevelopment, then siting and design guidelinesshould form the basis of landscape and visualimpact assessment criteria. These guidelines canalso assist in addressing undesirable landscapeand visual impacts.

Application of visual management guidelines mayresult in substantial alterations to developmentproposals, such as changes to the location of thedevelopable area or the proposed density, scale

Image 45: The dark, broken roofs of the Quay WestResort at Bunker Bay and its location behind theforedune, allow it to blend into its rural coastallandscape setting.

PART THREE


Subdivision layout to maximise publicaccess to coastal views

Roads in coastal suburbs and developmentnodes can be designed to provide view corridorsto provide road users with ocean glimpses. Roadsand pedestrian access ways orientated towardsthe coast create corridors for viewing the ocean.Buildings obstructing the line-of-sight to thehorizon is a critical element to consider.

An individual set of guidelines and possiblyplanning conditions may be developed for eachnode, with input from the local community andprofessional advisers such as planners,landscape architects and urban designers toensure that coastal development nodes areintegrated into their natural or rural landscapesettings.

Development should only be permitted when itcan demonstrate:

• sensitivity to natural landform;

• no intrusion onto the ocean skyline fromelevated viewpoints or land horizon fromshoreline viewpoints; and

• colours and materials match orcomplement those of the natural landscapesetting.

It is necessary to undertake design studies fornew development nodes in natural landscapes, todetermine the appropriate building height foreach development area, and the results need tobe incorporated into zoning controls or designguidelines. Factors to consider include:

• the height of existing buildings;

• the surrounding landforms; and

• the height of natural vegetation.

Buildings should not overshadow beaches andother coastal recreation sites. They may bedesigned to suit the scale of the tallest local trees,such as peppermints, Rottnest Island tea trees orcoastal wattles, or the tallest introduced trees,such as Norfolk Island pine trees.

Each proposed lot should possess a suitable sitefor a building envelope and access driveway, toensure that visual management objectives for thedevelopment node can be met. This can beachieved by analysis of each potential lot prior tofinalisation of the lot layout.

Nodes need to be confined and to comprise onlyuses that are relevant to a coastal location.

Urban coastal frontage roads

Urban coastal frontage roads separating housingand commercial development from the foreshorereserve should be located:

• behind the primary dune, with minimalearthworks;

• at a setback distance which allows forcoastal processes including shorelinerecession;

• where ocean views can be provided frommore elevated sections of road further fromthe coast, through gaps between theprimary dunes, or from spur roads thataccess beaches;

• where opportunities exist for an undulatingroad alignment that uses natural peaks andtroughs in the dune system.

Image 46: Although roads such as West CoastDrive, north of Trigg, provide a valued viewingexperience for motorists, the road and trafficdominate the coastal landscape.

PART THREE


Buildings in foreshore reserves

The siting and design of public purpose buildingssuch as ablution blocks, surf clubrooms, searchand rescue facilities, kiosks and restaurantsshould be visually compatible with the characterof the reserve in which they are located. Roofforms, colours and textures are critical designconsiderations.

These buildings may be highly visible forfunctional reasons, or where the landscape lacksvegetation screening. They warrant particularlycareful attention to both detailed siting and designaspects. They need to comply with therequirements contained in the State CoastalPlanning Policy (WAPC 2003).

Coastal roads in natural landscapes

Continuous scenic roads parallel to naturalshorelines are inappropriate as their disturbanceto the landform creates a negative affect on thelandscape. It is preferable to locate roads behindthe primary dune as an edge to urbandevelopment and to provide access to coastaldestinations from narrow loop roads or dead-endspur roads, which have the additional advantageof providing a more natural setting for coastalwalks parallel to the coast.

Coastal access roads in natural landscapes needto be carefully sited and engineered to ensurethat they do not dominate the natural characterand views, and provide coastal access ratherthan high speed vehicle thoroughfare.

New roads constructed in the vicinity of the coastin natural or rural landscapes can be located toenhance the users’ experience, by providing avariety of types of coastal views, and theexperience of movement over the undulatingground form characteristic of dunes.

Vegetation planning and management inurban coastal landscapes

The vegetation component of the urbancoastlines’ unique character should be retainedthrough the protection and restoration of naturalvegetation characteristics.

Vegetation planting and management indevelopment nodes in natural or ruralcoastal landscapes

Local indigenous vegetation should be retained orrestored wherever possible, including vegetationin road reserves, open space, and on privateproperty. Although a wider range of species maybe acceptable for use in development nodes, thefocus should remain on local species to providevisual linkages with the natural landscape setting.

Image 47: Use of palm trees in this formal foreshorereserve at Broome links with cultural elements of thetown’s landscape.

Image 48: Restaurant at City Beach uses white roofmaterials and local limestone to provide visual linksto its beachfront setting.

PART THREE


Siting and design of buildings adjacent tourban coastline

The State Coastal Planning Policy (WAPC 2003)aims to ensure that land use and developmentadjacent to the coast is sited and designed tocomplement and enhance the coastalenvironment. Strategies are intended to assist inachieving this aim.

Local government, in conjunction with the localcommunity, should develop an overall visualmanagement strategy or theme for urban coastaldevelopment nodes, addressing such topics as asuitable range of materials and colours, the extentto which buildings and structures will visuallydominate the landscape, key views to remainunobstructed by foreshore buildings, andappropriate building height, scale andappearance.

Buildings adjacent to urban coastline should belocated on sites that are not visually intrusive asseen from the adjacent foreshore reserve,especially from beaches, lookouts, dual use pathsand picnic sites. Visually intrusive sites includeheadlands, foredunes, and crests of dune ridges.It would also be desirable to avoid locatingbuildings in areas of visually significant coastalvegetation such as tuart woodland, or heathvegetation with rock outcrops.

The height of proposed new buildings should takeinto account:

• the existing streetscape, including theheight of existing buildings and other visuallandscape components;

• the type of settlement ie a lowerpermissible height for isolated individualbuildings, hamlets and villages, and ahigher height permitted in coastal regionalcentres and the Perth metropolitan area;

• the height of existing and new tall trees,such as Norfolk Island pines, so thatbuildings remain below the tree canopy, toallow these trees to continue to dominatethe visual landscape;

Foreshore reserve site planning and design

Infrastructure in foreshore reserves is often highlyvisible. Visual clutter should be avoided inforeshore reserves and facilities and managementstructures should be well sited and designed tominimise the footprint and to reflect a sense ofscale that accords with the surroundinglandscape. Organic shapes may be more suitablethan strong geometric forms.

In natural landscapes the style of built elementsand landscaping should be more informal than inurban areas, with a greater emphasis onmaintaining the visual dominance of naturallandscape elements.

Specific components of reserves that needparticular attention include: car parks, dual usepaths, access paths and steps, powertransmission poles, lighting and signs, recreationfacilities including tables, shelters and playequipment, amenity planting, and access barriersincluding fencing and bollards.

Image 49: Organic design of picnic shelters at CityBeach with planting used to create shelter.

Image 50: Play equipment can create visual clutterin foreshore reserves unless it is carefully designed,as in this example at City Beach. Here the coloursmatch the coastal setting, the equipment is placedbelow the natural ground surface and the overalldesign is of a high quality.

PART THREE

These landscapes are subject to developmentpressures, although probably to a lesser extentthan coastal landscapes. Rivers and estuariesaround the State’s coastline are universallyappreciated. Examples include:

• the tranquil south coast inlets such asWilson’s Inlet at Denmark, theNornalup/Walpole Inlet and Hardy Inlet atAugusta;

• the extensive Murray/Peel/Harvey andAvon/Swan/Canning river systems on thesouth west coast; and

• gorges and extensive systems in the driernorthern half of the state, such as theMurchison River at Kalbarri, the Ord Riverand the internationally-known gorges ofKarijini National Park.

Visual elements

Natural waterform and landform features ofriverine and estuarine landscapes include thewater body, shoreline cliffs and rocky edges,steep slopes, banks, beaches, floodplains, oxbowlakes, sand bars, islands and delta formations.Edges of water bodies form a strong linearelement, while texture diversity is created by thechanging surface of water bodies, which variesfrom choppy to smooth and reflective.

Vegetation patterns are often simple and easy tointerpret, with particular plants found in asequence depending on the distance from watersedge. Typical components include reeds, tall,densely foliaged shrubs, paperbark trees andeucalypts. Some species, such as flooded gumsand river red gum, are typically found alongwaterways over extensive regions, providing avisual link between these landscape features,regardless of their immediate landscape setting.Fringing vegetation may be reflected in theadjacent water and may feature branches thatoverhang the water, taking on unusual forms andbranching patterns.

Prominent cultural features include watercraft,bridges, jetties and marinas, as well as structures


Boating facilities and associateddevelopment

To minimise adverse impacts on valued naturallandscape character, boating facilities should belocated in safe, but less valued, less prominentlocations, such as straight stretches of unvariedcoastline.

Riverine and estuarine landscapes

Background

Riverine and estuarine landscapes are highlyvalued by the community. For example, the 2005community survey conducted for the PerthCoastal Planning Strategy found that, in themorning at least, residents were almost as likely totake visitors to the river, as take them to the coast.

• adjacent landforms, to allow landform tocontinue to dominate the setting;

• potential visibility from nearby coastalrecreation sites; and

• other town planning scheme guidelines inrelation to height.

The use of local styles of coastal architecture,including local materials, may be encouraged, asstyles based on local conditions and architecturaltraditions may enhance the unique character oflocal urban coastal landscapes.

Image 51: These Norfolk Island pines could softenthe impact of buildings up to three or four storeys.

PART THREE


Management and planning needs to consider thecharacter of each precinct yet also be mindful ofwhole of resource implications. The river is acomposite of many parts; it may meander, or runstraight, may include calm or turbulent open wateror sedge land. Planning and management shouldrespect this complex interrelationship by site-specific analysis and responsive design.

The pressures for public recreational use orcommercial use of the river landscape cancumulatively degrade the intrinsic landscapequalities. It is important that development andland use in the riverine landscape unit beregulated and that sufficient land is set aside tobuffer the river from adverse impacts.


Principles and guidelines in relation to riverineand estuarine landscapes should address majoror significant river and wetland systemsthroughout Western Australia, particularly those inor alongside urban areas and rural settlements.The following topics should be addressed:

River and estuarine systems in urban settings

• In residential areas, consider: shorelinehousing density, street pattern, dominanthousing style, age, bulk, scale, colours,building materials and roof forms.

• In commercial areas, consider: the scaleand height of buildings, land use intensity,water and land interface and publicinfrastructure, including ferry terminals,public art and signage.

• In recreation areas, consider: water andland use, recreation facilities andamenities, kiosks, cafes, other commercialoperations, signage, public access,introduced and native vegetation,landscaping treatments and public art.

along the foreshores and in the viewshed of waterbodies, such as buildings, roads and powerlines.

Riverine and estuarine landscapes provide viewcorridors along linear water bodies and openvistas across large water bodies. Along rivers,views may be enclosed or canopied by fringingtrees. Rivers provide a sequence of places andlandscape interpretations.

The prominence of foreshore locations, forexample, as viewed across open water or fromelevated viewpoints such as cliff-top lookouts,makes them visually sensitive locations.


Foreshore locations are valued for housing andparticular forms of commercial development, suchas tourist accommodation or restaurants, largelybecause of their river views. Due to the highproperty values of river front land this landscapetype is under serious pressure from the landdevelopment industry. On the lower reaches ofthe Swan-Canning River system in Perth, landvalues and demand for property anddevelopment opportunities are very high, withnumerous development proposals that are relatedto the riverside location.

Foreshore areas are often treated as the edge ofa planned locality and therefore are not affordedsufficient consideration in the course of planningand development. They experience particularpressure for use by transport routes such asfreeways, scenic roads and recreational trails.

Adjacent private development may impinge onpublic foreshores, in the form of overlooking,illegal removal of trees in the foreshore reserve,the dumping of rubbish, and the invasion of weedspecies into natural areas of the river foreshore.

The impact of too much light can affect feature-litlandmarks and interfere with fauna. Fringingvegetation may be damaged by human impactssuch as storm water discharge, speedingwatercraft, increasing salinity of the water, anddigging for bait.

PART THREE


Development in the river and/or estuarinesetting

Intrusive development on the water, foreshore andin the viewsheds of rivers and wetlands should beavoided.

Measures to reduce the intrusiveness ofdevelopment include:

• the consideration of the skyline andshoreline as key visual elements;

• maximising the distance wheredevelopment is set back from the foreshoreor foreshore open space;

• using open style fencing along theboundary between private and public openspace; and

views from elevated points overlooking a river,and linear views eg along a river corridor, as wellas canopied and axial views. Valued views shouldbe maintained or enhanced.

River and estuarine systems in rural settings

In rural settings, consider the following factors:

• setback

• remnant vegetation, including the retentionof trees and flood fringes

• roads and bridges

• public infrastructure

• flood levees

• intensity of agricultural use

• subdivision

• land clearing and fencing

• billabongs and oxbows

• wetlands and confluence areas

• environmental flow (impact of agriculturaldams)

• stocking rates.

River and estuarine systems in naturalsettings

In natural settings, consider ways to retainlandform and vegetation in a relatively unalteredcondition, with minimal development suitable forpassive recreation. Consider factors such as:

• public access

• retention of fluvial vegetation

• low key recreation facilities

• interpretation facilities

• amenities and signage

• low impact structures.

Protection of significant viewsheds

Most river systems are bounded by areas thatoffer views to the river and opposite banks.Riverine views are indicative of the area's localidentity and are usually highly valued by localcommunities. Valued views are often associatedwith topographic high points, or areas with lowvegetation. Examples of valued individual views inriver viewsheds include panoramic views, such as

Image 52: Public enjoyment of river views can beenhanced by the addition of facilities such asseating, as at Mosman Park.

Image 53: Orienting roads towards rivers andestuaries creates view corridors with the water bodyat the focal point.

PART THREE

Protection of biophysical processes

The health and quality of water bodies has adirect impact on their landscape value. Strategiesshould address the impacts of stormwater runoff,pollutants, algal blooms, land and marine basedconservation areas, modifications to the naturaltopography and fringing vegetation on riverprocesses, erosion, accretion, flooding andprotection of the benthic zone (seagrass andnatural fish nurseries).

Places of cultural significance

Strategies need to take account of sites of culturalsignificance, as the presence of significantcultural features or places, including placessignificant to Aboriginal people, can be importantfeatures of the landscape. Places may be thesubject of a story, a memory, a ceremony or justan inspiration.


• reducing the use of foreshore retainingwalls.

There is a need to address the impact of:

• structures on or over the water, such asjetties, boat moorings, marinas;

• structures and planting on the foreshore,such as shelters, toilets, pathways, kiosks,yacht clubs, landscape treatment includingplanting with either exotic or nativevegetation; and

• development in the broader viewshed.

Image 54: Tall trees can reduce the visibility ofriverside buildings.

Public access of the foreshore

In urban areas the acquisition of foreshore landfor public access is a high priority, with land beingobtained for public ownership. This enablespublic management of foreshore areas. In ruralareas, public access is not a priority andforeshores are likely to remain largely in privateownership. Management strategies required bylandowners need to address such issues asfencing, interruption of water flow and protectionof fringing vegetation.

Image 55: Construction of public pathways alongforeshores may be particularly intrusive and difficultin steep locations as at Freshwater Bay on the SwanRiver.

Siting and design of transport routes andriver crossings

Strategies need to address the location anddesign of dual use paths, bridges, overpasses,railway lines and stations, bus ports, ferryterminals and jetties, as viewed from and to thewater body. The design of these facilities needs tohave regard to impacts on the skyline, shorelineand waterline.

PART THREE


greater distances from the ridge, the skyline iscloser to the highest part of the landform.

These elevated landforms provide a location forviewing the landscape below and they provide afocal point for views from adjacent land at lowerelevations.


Changes to the character of prominent elevatedfeatures will be noticed. Some pressures on theselandform backdrops result from the elevationprovided by the landform eg radio and TV masts,telecommunications towers, wind turbines, waterstorage tanks, housing, scenic drives, recreationnodes; lookout structures, and memorials.Pressures for hard rock quarrying results from theexistence of hard rock at or close to the surface.Power lines, roads and fire-breaks are normalinfrastructure found in any rural or naturallandscape, but they are likely to be moreprominent if located in elevated areas.

Prominent elevated landscapes

Background

A number of urban areas, including Perth andsome regional centres, are located at the base ofan elevated landform that forms a backdrop to thebuilt up area. Examples include: the Darling Scarpbehind Perth; Mt Eliza immediately behind Perth’sCBD; the ridge behind Dunsborough; Mt Brownand Mt Bakewell at York; Mt Melville, Mt Clarenceand ridges surrounding the harbour at Albany; theMoresby Range at Geraldton; and the coastalridge behind Prevelly Park, Eagle Bay andAugusta.

Elevated areas may also be prominent in ruralareas, such as the Leeuwin-Naturaliste Ridge, thelower slopes of the Porongurup Range, and theDarling Scarp north and south of Perth.

Prominent, elevated landforms are generally eitherpart of an escarpment at the edge of a plateau, orcomprise individual hills or ridges. They may alsooccur adjacent to the coast or along a river.Landform backdrops are highly visible andimportant features that help define the characterof the landscape in which they are situated.

Visual elements

Elevated landforms could be considered more asfeatures in a broader landscape, rather than alandscape in themselves. They are essentially alarge landform element. Their key individualnatural landscape features include steep side-slopes, ridgelines, drainage lines, geologicalfeatures such as rock outcrops, cliffs and screeslopes, and remnant vegetation. The exampleslisted are generally vegetated. The steepness ofthe slopes may have limited their use foragriculture and settlement. In addition, clearingthese slopes could result in soil erosion.

The skyline is a prominent visual element. Itsexact position varies according to the viewer’slocation. From close to the base of the slope theskyline is further down-slope, whereas from

Image 56: Flat-topped elevated landforms close tobuilt up areas may come under particular pressurefor development (Moresby Range, Geraldton).


Specific strategies in other chapters should bereferred to, particularly those that address usesthat may occur on these backdrops, such as ruralresidential uses, quarrying, telecommunicationsfacilities and wind farms.

Some of the most important aspects to address inbackdrop landscapes, to assist in retaining thevisual prominence of natural landscape elementsare:

PART THREE


Undulating rural landscapes

Background

Rural landscapes may comprise hilly, enclosed,partly vegetated, undulating terrain. Where soilsand water supply are suitable these areas maysupport horticulture such as orchards orvineyards. Examples include areas aroundDenmark, the Ferguson Valley near Bunbury, theBalingup-Bridgetown-Nannup portion of theBlackwood Valley, the Margaret River region, MtBarker, Donnybrook, Chittering Valley and parts ofthe Swan Valley. The significance of these areasto the community is indicated by the value oftourism to the local economies, with a proliferationof tourist accommodation, restaurants, cafes andwineries.

Visual elements

These landscapes display a wide variety of forms,colours and textures, with a combination of bothnatural and cultural features.

The key individual visual components in theselandscapes are:

• natural features such as hilly terrain,ridgelines, valleys and drainage lines andremnant native vegetation, particularlytrees; and

• cultural features such as introducedvegetation in the strong linear grid patternof planted crops such as vines and fruittrees, as well as individual buildings.

Valued views are likely to include a diversity ofview types, including panoramic views fromelevated positions in the landscape, enclosedviews in deep valleys, focal views ahead of bendson undulating roads, canopied views acrossroads that support trees growing on either side,and the varied experience of driving through alandscape with a diverse range of natural andcultural features.

• vegetation should be retained on ridgelinesand skylines. Figure 2.25 in Section 2.4Tools and Techniques for visualassessments, explains how to identify thelocation of skylines on the ground.

• careful analysis of views should identifythose areas where structures should not belocated, to avoid them being silhouetted onthe skyline or on intermediate ridgelines.

If some development is considered acceptable onthe backdrop, the most suitable developmentareas should be identified. Suggested selectioncriteria include:

• areas located below steeper slopes, onfoothills;

• areas that are set back from individualnatural features such as drainage lines androck outcrops;

• areas selected on the basis of theirvegetation types; and

• areas that will support planting desired forscreening purpose, to reduce erosion, andso on.

Image 57: Buildings located at the base of steepside slopes in the Moresby Range, Geraldton.

Image 58: Development on the side of the ridgebehind Augusta is located below the ridge top.

PART THREE


characteristics that attract tourists to the area.Tourism developments in rural areas usuallycreate an activity node with increased vehiclemovement, an increase in population andadditional signage and access. These intensiveuse nodes may be seen as an urban element inan otherwise rural landscape.

The additional traffic generated by tourismdevelopments may create pressure for nearbyrural roads to be upgraded, including wideningand clearing of roadside vegetation. There mayalso be powerlines and clearing for undergroundservices. The siting and design of houses, sheds,tourist accommodation, restaurants, water tanksand other structures may result in them beingprominent features in the landscape. This is morelikely to occur if they are large, reflective,prominently sited or different in appearance fromexisting buildings and structures, and where theyoccur in landscapes that are valued for theirexisting character.

These issues and pressures discussed here fortourism in rural landscapes and rural areas canapply to the Rural Uses guideline also.


• Retain remnant vegetation throughout thelandscape.

• Ensure that structures are not located onthe skyline as seen from important viewinglocations.

• Revegetate cleared ridgelines, to maintainthe sense of elevation of these features thatbecomes diminished when vegetation islost.

• Develop a set of performance criteria inrelation to building density, as outlined inthe section on rural residential developmentin the rural issues chapter. These criteriashould relate to the number of buildingsvisible in a landscape before its characteris perceived to have changed from rural tourban in character.

Visual elements specific to tourism developmentsto consider in valued rural landscapes:

• siting and design of development;

• building design (colours, materials, height,reflectivity);

• parking areas;

• signage and entry statements;

• access from main roads; and

• clearing of remnant vegetation andagricultural land for development.


Pressures for change in these landscapes includemore intensive horticultural, residential, touristaccommodation and commercial uses such asrestaurants and wineries. With thesedevelopments come increased signage andupgrading of roads to deal with increased traffic.Plantations and large-scale farm forestryoperations could lead to screening of views.

In urban fringe areas there may be a decline inhorticultural use as land values and ratesincrease, favouring additional residentialdevelopment. The result may be abandonedorchards and vineyards and structures falling intodisrepair.

In regard to tourism developments in valued ruralareas, the principal issue is achieving a balancebetween providing increased access and otherfacilities while maintaining the visual landscape

Image 59: Undulating rural landscapes may displaya combination of hilly vegetated terrain withprominent cultural elements, as at Bickley nearPerth.

PART THREE


• Valued views should be maintained by notsiting buildings in locations that areprominent in views, for example, at focalpoints or from panoramic lookout points.

• View corridors should be maintained toimportant elements in views, such as avista to a scarp, and not inadvertentlyscreened by buildings, dense roadsideplanting or plantations.

In relation to tourism development someprinciples may consist of the following:

• avoid prominent sites such as elevatedpositions and areas visible from recreationsites including lookouts;

• incorporate local natural or traditionalbuilding materials and colours;

• reduce the mass and scale by constructingsmaller buildings instead of single largebuildings;

• reduce the mass and scale by dividing thelandscape into lots that are sizable to retainremnant vegetation and to provide areasfor further planting if needed;

• reduce extensive car parks associated withtourism nodes by breaking parking areasinto a number of smaller parking areas;and

• use setbacks and buffer strips along roadsbased on principles regarding visibility andscreening rather than arbitrary distances.

These principles listed here for tourismdevelopment in rural landscapes and areas canapply to the Rural Uses guideline as well.

Image 60: Retention of remnant vegetation on ridgesmay provide a greater sense of enclosure to valleys.

3.3 Guidelines forparticular land uses

Urban uses

Background

In this guideline the term urban is used in itsbroadest sense, to include suburban. It refers toregional centres as well as Perth. The majority ofWestern Australians live in Perth or a regionalcentre and the appearance of urban areas,particularly our own neighbourhoods, is veryfamiliar.

There is a vast array of urban landscapecharacter, and a diversity of communityexpectations and responses to their homesurroundings. People may value individualfeatures such as heritage structures, parks orstreetscapes and become emotionally attached tothem. They may also value the existing characterof particular vistas or views, such as views fromelevated coastal or river foreshore locations, orcity views from Kings Park.

Individual characteristics that the community ismost likely to want to maintain may be the obviousfeatures, as well as those that are distinctive orconsidered attractive. The community may alsowish to retain the valued ways in which theyexperience, use and visualise their surroundings:to maintain or enhance valued movementcorridors, nodes, boundaries and edges to areas,district character and landmarks.

This manual has been prepared to managelandscape change and assess potential visualimpacts. The techniques and methods outlined inPart 2 are applicable to urban areas as well asother landscape types and land uses. As a resultof increased population, and the majority of urbanareas gravitating towards the coast of WesternAustralia there is pressure for increased urbandevelopment. However there is a wide range ofurban settings requiring different evaluation aimedat reducing potential visual impacts on theexisting landscape character.

PART THREE


Therefore this manual focuses on more broadgeneric guidance for protection of valuedcharacter, major arterial roads and prominentbuildings as the major visual issues.

Use of this guideline

This guideline is intended for use by localauthorities, state government agencies and localcommunities interested in identifying, enhancingand protecting the valued landscapecharacteristics of urban areas. It focuses onspecific visual landscape issues and is notintended to be comprehensive.

Urban landscapes are the primary domain ofseveral design professions: urban designers, civilengineers, architects and landscape architects. Itis important to note that this guideline does notreplicate or impinge on the guidance that theseprofessions provide. Instead, it presents somebroad principles that address several specificvisual management issues pertinent to urbanareas. The background section to this guidelinealso provides some context of how the visuallandscape planning methods would apply todifferent types of urban areas and what theemphasis would be in areas ranging from smallsettlements through to the metropolitan regions.For the reasons outlined above, the structure ofthis guideline differs to others in this manual.

The development of broad principles that addressvisual management issues, and detailed sitingand design principles, should involve both thecommunity and design professionals workingtogether through the planning and designprocesses, beginning with the establishment of along-term vision and goals for desired character.

Agencies and groups

There are a number of agencies and groups thathave the capacity to take action affecting urbanlandscape character. Some have a broad interestor mandate, such as local authorities, while others

The visual landscape planning methods outlinedin Part 2 are applicable to those parts of theurban landscape that are dominated by naturallandscape features, such as river, coast andscarp, or that comprise cultural heritageprecincts. The methods are also relevant formanaging precincts that are designated forviewshed protection, such as the Parliamentaryprecinct.

As urban areas include smaller regionalsettlements through to the metropolitan area, thereare different focuses for the diversity of urbanstyle areas in Western Australia. For smallersettlements the approach may include landscapeassessments of new development in existingnatural landscapes. New development proposalsfor these areas would take into account thesignificance of natural and rural landscapecharacter. For larger country towns or regionalcentres, visual landscape planning may focus onachieving a balance between the built form andits natural setting. From regional centres throughto large metropolitan areas typified in Perth, thestructuring of urban form assumes significance.Although the natural features in the urban formremain key elements, the focus of the urban formin these larger areas is of great importance. Asbuilt characteristics of the urban landscapebecome more dominant the community’sassociation with the built elements becomesstronger and therefore more important.

Objectives for managing visual impacts in urbanareas should focus on achieving good designoutcomes that consider the natural and built formsimultaneously. Fitting development into theoriginal natural setting is not a priority. In respectto visual landscape restoration, the impetus forimprovement needs to come directly from thecommunity.

The urban land use issues considered in thisguideline were selected on the basis that manyurban landscape issues are comprehensivelycovered in other publications.

PART THREE


• Historic Heritage Conservation StatePlanning Policy 3.5 (WAPC 2007)

• Liveable Neighbourhoods (WAPC Edition1:1997, Edition 2:2000, Edition 3:2004)

• Liveable Neighbourhoods Review Task 1:Review of Changes in Design Approaches1996-2002 (WAPC 2004)

• Liveable Neighbourhoods – Street Layout,Design and Traffic Management (WAPC2000)

• Residential Design Codes (WAPC 2000)

• Network City: community planning strategyfor Perth and Peel (WAPC 2004)

• Towards a vision for Perth in 2029 (WAPC2000)

• Development control policies – addressinga wide range of topics including publicopen space and bicycle planning (WAPC)

• Development control guidelines, such asadvertising on reserved land

• Designing Out Crime: Planning Guidelines(WAPC 2006)

• Central Railway Precinct Guidelines (WAPC2004)

• A strategic plan for Perth’s Greenways(Final Report) (Alan Tingay and Associates1998)

• Townscape Guide (DPUD 1990)

• Easy Guide to Townscape (DPUD 1995)

• Bush Forever (WAPC 2000)

• Planning bulletins – various (WAPC)

• Local planning schemes and anyassociated precinct guidelines

• Local planning strategies.

have responsibility only for a particular site, ortype of infrastructure.

Agencies and groups that have a direct, holisticinterest in the character of the urban landscapeinclude:

• local community groups eg townscapecommittees and/or heritage groups;

• local authorities;

• Department for Planning and Infrastructure;and

• Department for Local Government andRegional Development.

Agencies directly involved in land development,including major urban renewal projects, include:

• regional development commissions;

• LandCorp;

• Subiaco redevelopment authority;

• East Perth redevelopment authority; and

• Joondalup development commission.

State agencies with a responsibility for specificservice infrastructure include:

• Main Roads WA;

• Department for Planning and Infrastructure;

• Transperth;

• Synergy and Western Power; and

• Water Corporation.

Existing policies and guidelines


• State Planning Strategy (WAPC 1996)

• Residential Design Codes State PlanningPolicy 3.1 (WAPC 2002)

• Urban Growth and Settlement StatePlanning Policy 3 (WAPC 2006)

PART THREE


components as property and house size, buildingdesign, mature gardens with large trees,streetscape character and open space, as well asloss of natural and cultural features such asremnant bush, mature original trees, wetlands,dunes, vineyards, orchards, market gardens andsmall neighbourhood centres and outstandingheritage trees such as sugar gums and stonepines. Overlooking private property from adjacentelevated roads, bridges and pedestrianoverpasses are current issues. Solutions oftencomprise intrusive walls.

Poor neighbourhood maintenance whereproblems may include derelict industrial areas,unscreened scrap yards, unoccupied properties,graffiti, litter, broken or vandalised public facilities,and road verges, parks, and street trees that arepoorly maintained.

Trees on river or coastal foreshore reserves mayobscure views from adjacent private properties.Such trees are sometimes illegally removed andmay be difficult for local authorities to maintain.

Major arterial roads

Light industry and commercial uses along majorarterial roads can be a visual issue where roadsapproaching country towns and along majorroads in Perth, such as Scarborough Beach Roadand Great Eastern Highway, are often the locationof strip development including light industry, largeretail premises and car yards, fronted by roadside


In an urban context the landscape has oftenalready been significantly altered from a natural orrural state and often the only naturalcharacteristics that are evident are landform,topography and remnant vegetation. The mainvisual impacts are the result of incrementaldecisions and actions of a large number of privateagencies and individuals. These might includeprivate landowners; local government and serviceagencies that are involved in the decision makingprocess that contribute to the appearance of theurban landscape.

Community experience in urban areas is typicallyas residents of a local community, at a workplaceor educational institution, or moving through areaseither as a pedestrian, cyclist or in a vehicle. Attimes visual awareness can be of a small orlocalised area, or it can be a large expanse of anurban landscape, depending on the topography.

From time to time development proposals raisecommunity concern due to potential visualimpact. The techniques outlined in this manualcan contribute to improved coordination ofdecisions to achieve better design outcomes inresponse to community concern.

The majority of issues related to urbanlandscapes are primarily local level issues thatwould be addressed by local authorities, inresponse to community concern. There areseveral issues that would be raised as regionalissues.

Loss of valued character

Valued landscapes are under pressure wheredevelopment is proposed in sensitive locationssuch as scarp faces, coastline or river foreshores,or land situated in important individual views suchas the view from Kings Park to the city or fromParliament House to the river.

Perceived loss of local landscape character overtime is an issue, such as changes to such

Image 61: Any development proposed for riverforeshores in this valued view from Mosman Parkwould need to be assessed very carefully due to thesignificance of the view.

PART THREE


Prominent buildings

Prominent buildings may be considered to be outof scale with their surroundings, for example,stadium light towers in residential areas. High-risedevelopment is usually an issue unless it isproposed to be located in a central businessdistrict. Community concern seems to focus onheight, overshadowing and potential blocking ofviews.

The siting and design of cultural icons such asmemorials, sculptures and new landmarkbuildings, such as Perth’s bell tower, and the newforeshore convention centre can raise communityconcern.


Protection of valued character


Visual landscape guidelines must relate toexisting town planning schemes and residentialdesign codes, and where necessary provide forscheme amendments.

The character approach to visual landscapeplanning begins with application of the methodsset out in Part 2 of this publication. The outputshould include identification of urban landscapefeatures valued by the community at a regional,local or site level. These features may be eithernatural (landform or vegetation) or cultural. At alarger scale whole areas or precincts may beidentified as requiring protection, as opposed tojust individual features. Valued individualviewsheds and key views also require specificattention.

parking lots. Trees and other plants are usuallyabsent, as the focus is on the visibility of businesspremises to passing traffic. These strips arefrequently criticised as being visually clutteredand discordant, and lacking connections to thesurrounding landscape. They are seen as difficultto read from a moving vehicle. With urbanexpansion into rural areas, light industry andcommercial uses may expand into olderresidential properties and small rural properties,creating blight, as land values increase andexisting properties physically decline.

Roadside advertising signs can be an issueincluding large urban billboards, such as thoselocated along urban railway lines adjacent tomajor roads. Walls adjacent to roads: tall soundand visual barriers; retaining walls along freewaysthat create a stark, urban canyon effect, and areprone to graffiti are also an issue. Solutionsinclude improved wall design and painting ofmurals to discourage graffiti.

Image 62: The appearance of Scarborough BeachRoad, Innaloo, has been improved by removal ofoverhead powerlines. However there is still potentialfor further enhancement.

Image 63: The siting and design of this sculpture atNorth Cottesloe was the subject of much communitydebate when initially proposed.

PART THREE

Wherever feasible, natural watercourses andartificial drains should be located at naturalground level, situated in open space corridorsand parkland, rather than being pipedunderground. These watercourses may besuitable as pedestrian spines throughdevelopment areas. Water sensitive urban designprinciples may be used to harness scarce waterresources, to ensure that open spaces continue toprovide a green environment as a counterpoint tothe typical hard surfaces of urban areas.

Vegetation

It is recommended that remnant bush be retainedwherever feasible, as it provides a strong visualreminder of an area’s original landscapecharacter, thus forming a major component in anurban area’s current expression of character.

Retention of regional scale remnant bush, such asregional greenway corridors, can provide a visuallink across the entire fabric of an urban area, andcan provide links to extensive bushland adjoiningurban areas, such as water catchment areas ornational parks.


Natural features

Landform

At a regional level in Perth, for example, valuednatural landscape features could include theDarling Scarp, Mt Eliza, Swan and Canning rivers,the coastline, and wetland systems. Local levelnatural features may include limestone pinnaclesor cliffs in coastal or river neighbourhoods, orenclosed valleys or granite outcrops in hillssuburbs.

The reduction of natural topographic variationsshould be avoided wherever feasible, especiallyin relation to road design and levelling for housingestates. This would retain a more diversetopography.

Building setbacks from valued features such asthe coastline, river and estuarine foreshores,wetlands and individual site features such as rockoutcrops should be sufficient that these featuresmaintain their prominence in the landscape.

Image 64: The Swan River is a major naturallandscape feature in the urban landscape of Perth.The river’s sinuous form creates great visual interest,with prominent sites at river bends.

Image 65: The re-introduction of water bodies atLangley Park and East Perth is breaking down thesharp demarcation between riverine and urbanelements of Perth’s landscape.

Images 66 and 67: Portions of Bannister Creek,Lynwood, have been reconstructed to a more naturalconfiguration and revegetated. These portionscontrast markedly with sections in which the creek isstill maintained as an open, artificial drain.

PART THREE


It is important to protect even small remnants ofurban bushland, such as those that are located indeveloped parkland. Such areas can besupplemented with additional planting and keptclear of weeds so their appearance is morecompatible with their setting. Use of local speciesin open space, especially where these alreadyexist in the park, will provide visual links with theoriginal landscape character. Some areas ofbush-style planting may be created using localnative species.

Remnant individual native trees may provideimportant visual landscape clues or links in alocal area, especially in areas that contain littleremnant bushland. Inventories of remnant trees

located on public land should be undertaken at alocal level, including trees in land managed at astate level, such as in railway and freewayreserves. Remnant trees located on private landshould also be inventoried, provided there iscommunity support. Strategies for protectingthese trees should be developed, with substantialcommunity input.

The use of suitable local native trees and shrubsin public spaces including parks, and rail androad reserves, may help to emphasise alandscape’s individual character. Considerationshould be given to the use of a variety of localplants. Shrubs should be used with great care inparks and on road verges as they may providecover for criminal activity (refer to Designing OutCrime: Planning Guidelines WAPC 2006).

Visually complementary plant species should beused in median strips and verge planting, ratherthan species that contrast markedly in form andcolour (such as pines, palms, roses or petunias),unless these are valued for heritage or culturalreasons.

Cultural features

Valued regional level cultural landscape featurescould include the Swan Valley vineyards, marketgarden areas, historic built precincts such asGuildford and Fremantle, as well as locally valuedindividual features such as lime kilns.

Historic buildings, bridges, narrow roadways,railway infrastructure and other structures may beimportant to local landscape character and as

Image 68: Remnant individual trees on private landsuch as this jarrah tree in Doubleview, provide areminder of the landscape’s original character.

Image 69: Median planting at Cottesloe providesvisual links with nearby dune vegetation, and thetraditional pines of the area.

Image 70: Mature sugar gums are a feature ofClaremont.

PART THREE


Roads have the potential to provide significantview corridors, providing axial views along theroad ahead to valued features such as the river,ocean, hills, parkland or provide panoramicgeneral views from an elevated position. Thispotential should be realised where possible, forexample, creation of axial views by aligning newroads towards these features. Road layoutsshould not allow buildings and roadside trees to

such should be retained where feasible.Examples of other valued localised culturallandscape components include traditionalbuilding materials, colours and styles, placementof buildings on blocks and relationships ofdwellings to garages.

Street trees may be important local features,providing cultural heritage links. Some townsbecome identified with one or two types of treessuch as the Moreton Bay figs of Dongara, as doolder metropolitan suburbs, for example, thepeppermints of Peppermint Grove, the NorfolkIsland pines of Cottesloe and the jacarandas ofApplecross. New planting is required if thesefeatures are to remain in the long term.

Valued cultural landscape features should notonly be retained, but should remain as visible,even prominent, features. Where possible theycould be reinstated with new development,complementing the established character. Forexample, historic elements and themes may beincorporated into modern architecture, streetfurniture and public artwork.

Valued viewsheds and individual views

Individual viewsheds and views may beparticularly valued by the community. Examples ata regional level include coastal or river viewshedsas seen from coastal roads and beaches and theview from Kings Park towards Perth’s city centre.The siting and design of development in importantviews requires careful consideration, especially atfocal points such as sites that are on a road bendor coastal headland.

Image 71: Lime kilns at Coogee are an example ofcultural features retained in the urban landscape.

Image 72: The Gosnells quarry is located directlyahead of a section of Albany Highway, Maddington.A building has recently been constructed across thesame focal point. Careful attention to siting, designand planting could have reduced the visual impactof this building.

Image 73: Particular care should be taken in sitingand design of foreshore development where it islocated at the focal point of views provided by roadsat right angles to the coast, as at Eric Street,Cottesloe.

Image 74: An important river glimpse remains at theend of Bay Road, Claremont.

PART THREE

unnecessarily to the burden of compliance on thepart of the community. The value that thecommunity places on the landscape willdetermine its value to local government anddevelopers.

The guidelines could include:

• general principles in relation to buildingstyle, particularly the style of new buildingsin relationship to existing character;

• means by which new design may reflectlocal landscape characteristics in the useof building materials and designs;

• suggested types of precinct entrystatements or features, including signs,landmark features such as buildings ornatural features, or prominent vistas;

• lists of those plants that are suitable for usein a range of public locations, due to theirassociation with the valued characteristicsof the precinct;

• attention to the visibility and role of maturetrees on private land, where these are avalued landscape component;

• landscape treatments that promote localcharacter and provide an interestingexperience for pedestrians and motorists;

• application of townscape guidelines toenhance valued town centres;

• means by which public structures such asbus shelters and railway stations canexhibit visual connections to their valuedlandscape setting, through their design,artwork, and planting; and


impinge on views and roadside planting requirescareful planning to enable views to be retained.For example, trees may be set back from theroadside, or be of a species that filters or framesviews or provides a canopy, but does not screenviews to important features.

Design guidelines

Landscape design guidelines should be part ofthe local planning schemes. Where necessary ascheme amendment may be required torecognise or include the guidelines or to amendthe scheme text to ensure that the landscapes orlandscape features valued by the community areprotected and/or enhanced. Many town planningschemes have very detailed precinct guidelinesthat recognise some values that the communityhas identified, often including landscape values.

Precinct guidelines relate to many concepts ofprecincts already incorporated in some townplanning schemes and townscape plans. Alandscape precinct may provide an overarchingguide that addresses several land uses or culturalprecincts in the one landscape precinct. Equally,a small landscape precinct may be incorporatedin a larger built form precinct. Care will need to betaken to ensure that guidelines arecomplementary and do not confuse or add

Image 75: The landscape at Scarborough retains agreen appearance, including a vegetated ridgelineprofiled against the ocean. Design guidelines canwork towards achieving this type of urbanlandscape.

Image 76: Precinct guidelines could be developedfor prominent areas such as beachfront developmentat Scarborough, addressing such issues as buildingorientation and style.

PART THREE


Analysis of a valued landscape precinct’s existingbuilt character for input into design guidelinesmay take a thematic approach, addressing thecritical development periods of an area, which thelandscape should support or underscore.

Streetscape

The visual amenity of public areas, includingstreets and open space, is critical to our sense ofsafety, comfort and wellbeing. If these spaces areconsidered unattractive and are poorlymaintained they may be under-used, thusimpacting on community safety and well-being.

Building setbacks should be established takingaccount the space required to support thedesired types of vegetation. To reduce the starkappearance of back lanes, the use of landscapetreatment should be considered, especially inmedium density housing areas.

In Western Australia’s climate, trees and otherforms of shade are vital amenity considerations,both for shade and for reducing heat retention inbuilt up areas, in addition to their purely visualsignificance. The use of trees large enough tocreate canopies over streets should beconsidered, particularly for pedestrian-orientatedresidential and commercial precincts.

Existing established trees in inner city, built upand suburban areas should be retained wherepossible in light of new development, orredevelopment of established urban areas.

Image 78: Distinctive local trees, such as this boabin Broome, can be used to acknowledge locallandscape character.

• advice on signs, which should be incharacter with their precinct, not toovisually prominent, and should not createovershadowing or visual clutter.

Some guideline principles may be the subject ofpolicies and regulations, for example, those thataddress such aspects as building setbacks,height, front walls, signage (such as size,location, rules for vacant land, form and style).

Guidelines may also address the design of privatedevelopment to ensure that development looksappropriate in its valued urban landscape setting.Characteristics to be considered may includeheight, bulk and proportion, control and designspecifications.

Image 79: The colouring of this City Beach busshelter is a reminder of its coastal setting.

Image 77: The design of this coastal lookout atNaval Base reflects its industrial setting.

PART THREE


Prominent buildings

The prominence of tall buildings in urbanlandscapes warrants particular care in their sitingand design, including consideration of theirrelationship to other nearby tall buildings.

Tall buildings should be located together inclusters or nodes rather than strung out in a line,to contain their impact to a smaller area.

To create a more graduated profile, the tallest in acluster of buildings should be located inside thenode, not at a separate location or at the edge ofthe group. A varied and graduated skyline shouldbe created, with a variety of building height andform.

Important view corridors should be maintainedbetween buildings, such as where views areobtained to a major landscape feature such asthe coast, river or scarp face. Examples in Perth’sCBD include view corridors to Parliament House,the river or Kings Park. Guidelines for the centralrailway precinct, for example, note the need toretain view corridors linking central Perth toNorthbridge.

Images 80 and 81: Drainage sumps in parkland atScarborough are screened with large shrubs.Another option would be to plant the sump itself, asthis example at Swanbourne.

Image 83: A canopy is created by the avenue ofmature sugar gums on Bay Road, Claremont.

Image 82: The creation of median planting islandsmay enhance a small town’s streetscape, as atNewdegate.

Image 84: The visual impact of isolated tall buildingssuch as Rendezvous Observation City, Scarborough,can be reduced by adjacent planting with tall-growing tree species, such as Norfolk Island pines.

PART THREE


Rural uses

Background

The term ‘rural’ is used in the guideline to refer tonon-urban landscapes that have beensubstantially modified, generally by clearing.

Significant tracts of uncleared land such as Stateforest, nature reserves, national parks andpastoral leases are excluded from considerationin these guidelines. For example, the location anddesign of new roads through tracts of unclearedland such as nature reserves or national parks aresubject to rigorous planning processes andconstruction standards. Visual considerations aretaken into account.

The rural land uses addressed in this guidelinewere chosen on the basis that their landscapeimpacts are currently of concern to thecommunity. For this reason, some important ruraluses, such as grain crops or grazing, are notdiscussed. Discussion focuses broadly ongeneric principles that address protection of ruralcharacter, remnant vegetation and/or clearing,revegetation and rural roads. In more detail thisguideline addresses rural residential issues andplantations.

The visual impacts of some topical land uses thatmay be located in either urban or rural settingsare addressed in detail in other guidelines. Thesecomprise industry, mines, quarries, utility towersincluding telecommunications facilities,powerlines and wind farms.

Some issues addressed in the urban usesguideline apply to rural settlements. The guidelinethat addresses sensitive landscape types such ashills and scarps comprising urban backdropsmay also be relevant.

Note: industrial uses, quarries and utility towers such asmobile phone towers and wind farms are addressed inseparate guidelines (refer to utility towers, mining andindustry).

Major arterial roads

To address the busy, harsh appearance typical ofcommercial sections of urban highways and manytown entries, consideration should be given toplanting street trees to provide a living elementthat also adds visual cohesion to the landscape.

Establishing wider setbacks may provide spacefor additional landscape treatments in front of newbusiness premises in less urbanised areas.

Strategies for signage and light poles along majorhighways should address the need to reducevisual clutter and the amount of visual distraction.Although these structures need to present acoherent appearance along the highways, itwould also be desirable for them to reflect thelocal neighbourhoods through which they pass.

The placement of powerlines undergroundreduces visual clutter and provides opportunitiesfor larger trees to be planted on roadsides,including trees that will provide a canopy acrossthe road.

Guidelines for building frontages in commercialprecincts that border major highways shouldaddress the need to reduce visual clutter. Suchguidelines should protect existing façades thatare more friendly to pedestrians and passingmotorists. The building style of commercialprecincts should be memorable, legible, andreflect local character.

Image 85: Visual clutter along West Coast Drive,North Beach, is being addressed by improved roadtreatment, fencing, lighting and the placement ofunderground power.

PART THREE

Visual impact assessments should be undertakenfor proposals with potential to affect rurallandscapes, such as:

• rural residential subdivisions;

• remnant vegetation clearing, revegetation,and farm forestry, including plantations;

• major tourism developments (refer tovalued landscapes under pressure:undulating rural landscapes);

• new roads, or major changes to characterof existing roads with scenic value; and

• windfarms and other utilities (addressed inUtility towers guideline).

The scope of this guideline is restricted to visuallandscape issues. There is a wide range of landplanning issues relevant to rural development,such as soil conservation, soil salinity, flora andfauna protection, surface water quality, heritageprotection and fire hazard reduction. Most ofthese have visual impacts however, and arereferred to in this context. These issues areaddressed comprehensively in other publications.The major issues that are addressed in terms ofvisual impact on rural landscapes comprise ofbroad generic issues.

It is assumed that the community would prefernatural and rural features to dominate rurallandscapes, and that any changes from a rural toa more urbanised appearance are ideally notnoticeable. Typically urban features that mayoccur in rural landscapes include curbed roads,large commercial signs or development with acommercial appearance.

Specific visual management objectives wouldideally be established for sensitive rurallandscapes through regional and local strategies,for application at regional, local or site levels.

It is assumed that the community is more likely tobe concerned about maintaining the character ofprominent rural landscapes that are adjacent tourban areas or valued natural landscapes such asnational parks.

Use of this guideline

It is anticipated that this guideline will primarilyassist:

• planners and consultants;

• local authorities (for example, assessingdevelopment proposals and determiningapproval conditions);

• local communities involved in ruralimprovement programs such as Landcareprojects;

• private rural landowners; and

• developers.

Agencies and groups

The State and local level agencies and groupsthat may have an interest in the contents of thisguideline include:


• Department of Agriculture;

• Department of Environment andConservation;

• Main Roads WA;

• Western Australian Tourism Commission;

• Bush Fires Board;

• local government authorities; and

• Landcare, revegetation and catchmentmanagement groups.


A number of the agencies listed above haveproduced policies and guidelines that focusspecifically on rural uses and areas; and shouldbe used in conjunction with this guideline:

• Agricultural and Rural Land Use PlanningState Planning Policy 2.5 (WAPC 2002)



PART THREE


• Rural development control policies (WAPC)

• Development Control Policies Guidelinesfor the Preparation of Local Rural Strategies(2004)

• Shire of Busselton Caves Road VisualManagement Policy (1999)

• Farm Forestry Policy Planning Bulletin 56(WAPC 2003)

• Avon Arc Sub Regional Strategy (WAPC2001)

• Draft Lower Great Southern RegionalStrategy (WAPC 2007)

• State Planning Policy 4.3 Poultry Farms(WAPC)

• Local planning scheme provisions(development control areas, clearingcontrols)

• Local planning strategies.

Protection of valued character

Background

This section of this guideline focuses on threerural issues that relate to the protection of rurallandscape character. The following issues are notdiscussed in as much detail as rural residential orplantations; however this section provides somebroad guidance in addressing certain aspects ofthese rural uses, in light of potential visualcharacter issues:

• remnant vegetation and clearing;

• revegetation; and

• rural roads.

The appropriate agencies and groups; andpolicies and guidelines for these issues arecovered in the sections directly above. Pleaserefer to these for policy guidance and relevantagencies when dealing with remnant vegetationand clearing, revegetation and rural roads.

Visual elements

Listed below are visual elements of remnantvegetation and clearing; revegetation and ruralroads that may have an impact on the characterof the rural landscape.

Visual elements specific to remnantvegetation and clearing; and revegetation:

• shape of vegetated area;

• height, density, form, colour, texture anddiversity of plant communities andindividual species;

• species appearance in relation to localnative vegetation (revegetation);

• planting pattern and/or layout;

• shape of cleared area;

• edges of cleared area; and

• contrast of cleared area to surroundingnative vegetation.

Visual elements specific to rural roads:

• road design speed;

• road width, including overtaking lanes;

• shoulder treatment, including barriers,drainage and curbing;

• elevation relative to surrounding landscape;

• alignment and/or configuration;

• surface markings;

• roadside signage; and

• roadside vegetation, including remnantvegetation and revegetation.


Remnant vegetation and clearing

Clearing of remnant native vegetation in ruralareas is a major issue because of the negativeimpacts on a number of important environmentalfunctions, including: minimising further landdegradation, such as salinity, wind and watererosion, and nutrient loss; protecting and retaining

PART THREE

Revegetation

Revegetation is an issue for many rurallandowners, due to its expense and practicalimplications for farm management, for example,where a riparian system that requires revegetationresults in paddocks being broken into areas that


biodiversity values, wildlife linkages; addressinggreenhouse effects; microclimate management;stock shelter; recreational enjoyment; lifestyle andcultural appreciation; and visual amenity.

Despite its benefits, landowners may viewremnant vegetation as an operational constraint interms of lost productivity and restrictions tomachinery movement. Farmers may be unwillingto pay the cost of managing these areas, such asproviding fire breaks, weed control and fencingdesigned to exclude stock and vehicles.

There are also problems with the retention ofparkland cleared areas and isolated remnanttrees in paddocks. These areas will disappearover time as regeneration is unlikely to occurwithout intervention.

Financial incentives are required to encouragelandowners to protect remnant vegetation. Thesecould include rate relief for remnant vegetationthat would otherwise be under productive uses,fencing subsidies and government support in theform of research, advice and data being madeavailable. Without such incentives, remnantvegetation will not be properly managed.

are too small for cropping or grazing, or wheremovement of machinery is restricted.

There needs to be clear identification of thosewaterways and wetlands that constitute the basisof riparian areas and the scale of the riparianzone needs to be determined. Where the riparianzone is devoid of remnant vegetation, landownersmay require assistance if they are expected torevegetate the area, as these areas may becomea weedy fire hazard once grazing or croppingstops.

There is also the issue of identifying anappropriate person or agency to takeresponsibility for managing revegetated riparianareas and wildlife corridors on private land.

The planting of wind breaks and shelterbelts canassist in protecting soil, crops and stock. Suchareas may take considerable effort and time toestablish, with variable success.

Rural roads

The issue of conflict between engineering designsafety standards and rural road appearance isdifficult to address. Road design standards areprimarily linked to traffic speed, so that problemsare focussed on roads designed for higherspeeds that are also used by motorists who mayprefer to travel more slowly to enjoy thelandscape. Strategies at a regional level shouldfocus on these roads eg Brand Highway, SouthWest Highway.

Image 86: The retention of even small areas ofremnant vegetation can help to maintain morevisually diverse rural landscape character.

Image 87: Difficulties may occur where rural roadsare shared by heavy vehicles and tourist traffic.

PART THREE


takes the form of entire remnant plantcommunities, remnant trees only with nounderstorey (known as parkland clearing), or justisolated individual trees remaining in paddocks.

Prominent sharp edges between cleared anduncleared bushland, for example, on hillsidesvisible from major travel routes, may be given amore natural appearance by supplementaryplanting in adjoining cleared areas to reduce theabruptness of the boundary, creating a moregradual transition zone.

Ridgelines that have been cleared look shorterand less dramatic than those that are vegetated.If ridgelines have been totally or partly cleared,they could be targeted in revegetation programs.

Revegetation

Planting may be used positively to emphasiseexisting natural and cultural features in thelandscape, such as natural drainage lines,vegetated shorelines and naturally wet areas,ridgelines and roadsides.

Where practical, riparian zones and otherlandform features designated for revegetationshould make use of natural factors such as soil ororiginal vegetation types to define theirboundaries.

Where vegetation reinforces natural linearelements such as creek-lines it is preferable forplanting to be naturalistic in its pattern, age andspecies used, for example, planting in a randomlayout, in stages, using local native species.

Main issues are whether the design speed allowsfor a road to fit into its landscape: the higher thespeed, the harder it is to get a road that fits.

Road alterations such as widening, drainageupgrades, straightening and creation of passinglanes frequently have an adverse visual impact,due to the clearing of roadside vegetation andlack of subsequent rehabilitation and weedmanagement. This is particularly an issue wherethe strip of vegetation was narrow to begin with,as the end result may be a roadside that iscompletely devoid of vegetation other than grassand weeds.

The proximity of trees to the sides of rural roads isan issue that is the subject of much communitydebate, couched in terms of user safety versusthe environment and/or aesthetics. Road safetyrelates to design speed and road width, as wellas the presence of safety barriers. Controversyappears to be focussed on tourist routes that alsoreceive heavy volumes of local traffic, such asCaves Road or the old highway through Ludlowtuart forest, in Busselton.

There are also issues related to the maintenanceof roadside remnant vegetation other than trees,for example, roadside vegetation that is valued forits annual wildflower display. Here issues revolvearound fire and weed management.

Roadside planting may block views from roads ifit comprises dense growth of medium to tallshrubs.

The deterioration of roadside remnant nativevegetation over time results in a loss of visualdiversity on roadsides, and a dry appearance insummer when annual weeds die off.


Remnant vegetation and clearing

The visual impact of clearing of remnantvegetation should be a factor considered in theassessment of applications for clearing. Remnantvegetation is worthy of protection based on itsvisual landscape value regardless of whether it

Image 88: The retention of shrubs at the edge ofwoodland creates a less abrupt boundary betweenremnant vegetation and adjacent agricultural areas.

PART THREE


slower speed, scenic route (such as the Ludlowtuart forest at Busselton).

Slower speed limits may be set for roads that onlyprovide access to tourist destinations, such as theTreetop Walk at Walpole.

If it is considered unsafe to retain large trees onroadsides, an alternative may be the retention ofshrubs only, presuming that shrubs do not inhibitvisibility. Another option could be the selectiveremoval of large trees such as those located onoutside curves.

Roadside vegetation management issues need tobe addressed, especially along roadsides thathave tourism values. Woody weeds such asVictorian tea tree, Japanese pepper trees orboxthorn should be removed as they may blockviews from the road by creating a dense hedgeeffect. They also tend to reduce visual diversity bydominating roadside vegetation and reducing thenatural variety of species.

Revegetation of roadsides may improve visuallandscape character. Although care is needed toensure that planting does not look alien to thelandscape if non-local plants are used. Denseroadside planting of tall shrubs should be avoidedto prevent the creation of a hedge effect thatrestricts open views.

Other weeds to be removed from along touristroutes include those species that dominate theroadsides, such as Watsonia and grasses,reducing the visual diversity of roadsidevegetation and creating a bleak appearance insummer, when these plants die and are removedby burning.

Housekeeping is required at roadside stoppingplaces, to remove litter, weeds and leftover roadbuilding materials. Planting trees and providingattractive picnic facilities may assist in improvingthe appearance of these areas.

Implement strategies to reduce the size, number,colour and style of large and prominent roadsidesignage on the approach and the entrance tocountry towns.

Planting that creates a cultural landscape feature,such as an avenue along a farm access track isbest kept simple, with the same species used foreach side. Avoid planting very different lookingspecies side by side, such as alternating tall treeswith mallees (see Image 90).

Promote natural regeneration where fencing isused to exclude stock, for example, alongstreams, around rock outcrops or on ridgelines.

Retain and provide buffers around natural featuressuch as creek lines, rock outcrops and wet areas.Assistance should be provided to landowners toenable them to revegetate these buffers, or toerect fencing that will allow natural regeneration tooccur.

Rural roads

Use design standards that are appropriate tousage type and compatible with landscapecharacter and possibly site new roads to minimisethe requirements for cut and fill.

Regional level strategies may include greater useof freight rail to reduce heavy haulage on touristroads and separate, bypass routes to segregatefast from slow traffic, enabling the retention of a

Image 89: This revegetation in the Chapman Valley,near Geraldton, would have contributed more to itssetting if it created a link with the river and was moredensely planted with random spacing.

Image 90: Planting should avoid locating differentspecies side by side.

PART THREE


Agencies and groups


• Department of Agriculture;

• local government authorities;

• Landcare groups; and

• rural residential communities.



• Agriculture and Rural Land Use StatePlanning Policy 2.5 (WAPC 2002)


• Planning for Bushfire Protection (DPI andFESA) 2001

• Environment and Natural Resource StatePlanning Policy 2003 (WAPC)

• Residential Design Codes State PlanningPolicy 3.1 (2002)


- DC 3.4 Subdivision of Rural Land(2002)

- DC 3.7 Fire Planning (2001)

- Development Control PoliciesGuidelines for the Preparation ofLocal Planning Strategies (2004)

- Guidelines: Rural residentialdevelopment in the Perth Metropolitanarea (1992)

• Local planning scheme provisions.

Visual elements

Listed below are visual elements of ruralresidential development that may affect the rurallandscape. They are addressed in detail in thefollowing section, principles and guidelines:

• developable area (site constraints andopportunities);

Rural residential development

Background

The guidelines below focus on rural residentialuse in landscapes that are essentially rural incharacter, although they may have large areas ofremnant native vegetation. Much of the advice,however, would also apply to the development ofrural residential areas in entirely naturallandscapes.

Rural residential developments have traditionallybeen limited to minimum lot sizes of 1 ha or 2 ha,or sometimes more. As a result the layout hasoften comprised just a standard grid of lots at ormarginally above that minimum permitted sizeand was unsympathetically imposed on thelandscape with little consideration ofphysiographic features, landscape values orenvironmental constraints. There is now a greaterawareness of the need for sustainablesubdivisions and developments that respect andenhance natural resources. This awareness is notrestricted to just the approval authorities, as localcommunities are also becoming more informedand better at articulating their values. Manylifestyle land purchasers are demanding a moreenvironmentally responsive product.

By removing the arbitrary restrictions on lot sizes,subdivision layout can incorporate a wide rangeof concepts aimed at producing a moresustainable, attractive and acceptabledevelopment. For example, by clustering lotsand/or dwellings, it may be possible to reduce lotsizes to that of just the building envelope. Theremaining land could then be retained with itsexisting character, as common land, for example.This arrangement could facilitate the economicservicing of the subdivision, management of thelots, protection of landscape values anddevelopment of a theme for the estate. It wouldenable valued landscape features, viewsheds andareas to be protected.

PART THREE


• number of lots and buildings, includingwater tanks and outbuildings;

• lot size and configuration;

• siting and design of buildings and otherstructures such as tanks;

• fencing and firebreaks;

• access roads and driveways;

• remnant vegetation and new planting; and

• site development/gardens/mini ruralproduction.


Rural residential development may significantlyalter rural character, producing a modified visuallandscape with a number of built elements thatare not necessarily in harmony with each other ortheir setting, such as driveways, fencing,buildings and a variety of introduced plants. Theytend to be located prominently, in rural areas thatare valued by the wider community for theirlandscape character. They may also be located innatural landscapes, which may in fact providemore opportunities than agricultural landscapesto locate buildings unobtrusively, depending onthe character of the terrain and the nativevegetation coverage.

Specific pressures for rural residentialdevelopment are indicated by rising land valuesand taxes, generally in the urban and/or ruralfringe areas. There is clearly an increasing marketfor people desiring a rural lifestyle while alsoenjoying the proximity to urban services such as

hospitals, retail and employment. In other casespeople are seeking a rural retreat for retirementand holidays. Pressure for rural development asholiday accommodation is more likely to occurfurther from urban areas, close to recreation areasor in areas suitable for hobby farms.

The landscape types addressed in the guidelineunder valued landscapes under pressure mayexperience particular pressure for rural residentialuse, for example; elevated backdrops to urbanareas, and undulating rural landscapes.


Regional and local level visual landscapecharacter assessments may be used to determinehow appropriate a general location is for ruralresidential use. Undertaking a formal visuallandscape character assessment provides visualmanagement objectives that apply to the site.Guidelines should address these objectives. Allproposals to rezone and/or subdivide rural landfor rural residential development should beaccompanied by a visual landscape characterassessment of the subject land and itsrelationship to the wider landscape setting,identifying all key landscape features, internal andexternal views, design responses and setting themanagement objectives.

Regional level visual landscape characterassessments will identify important regional viewsand viewsheds that should be protected, andgeneral areas that are likely to be more sensitiveto changes resulting from rural residentialdevelopment.

Rural residential development tends to bedemanded in prominent areas near towns inwhich the existing residents value the landscape’sexisting character.

At a site level, visual constraints and opportunitiesshould be identified and mapped.

Image 91: The footslopes of the Moresby Range,that provide a backdrop to Geraldton, areexperiencing development pressure.

PART THREE


overlap with cultural heritage features, which areassumed to be valued for their visual character,thus overlapping with the wide range of heritagecriteria such as historic associations, rarity andarchitectural integrity.

Open space may incorporate watercourses andother landscape features that are desirable forpublic access, such as visually interestingvegetation, ridgelines, valleys, rocky areas andsites that provide panoramic views. Alternatively,these features may be retained in undevelopedcondition but managed as common property or inprivate lots with suitable conservation orprotection covenants.

Structures of heritage value should be located inan appropriate setting, such as being bufferedfrom adjoining development.

Cleared portions of hillsides may be particularlyprominent, especially if they are surrounded byremnant vegetation with the result that the clearedarea takes on a distinctive shape. They may standout due to the contrast with the darkerappearance of the surrounding vegetation.Preferably buildings would not be located in thesehighly sensitive areas. If buildings are to beplaced here, they should be at the edges,softened with additional planting to match theadjacent remnant vegetation. The whole clearedarea may need to be planted to some degree, toreduce its prominence.

Most significant views of rural residentialdevelopment on hillsides may not be obtainedfrom immediately below the slope, but from up toseveral kilometres away, in the middle ground,where the whole context of the slopes on whichdevelopment occurs is clearly seen. Steep slopestend to look less dramatic from their base. Fromfurther away they look more vertical, more of abackdrop, and the entire slope, from base to topof ridge, is more likely to be visible. The top of theridgeline itself is more likely to be visible on theskyline, rather than a position part way up theside of the ridge forming the skyline.

Site constraints include areas that are:

• attractive features and their buffers such asrock outcrops, trees, heritage structures;and

• sensitive due to being prominently locatedin important views, or in areas of opencharacter with little variation or existing orpotential screening.

Site level opportunities include:

• areas that provide views in and from thesite but are not sensitive sites as seen fromexternal areas;

• areas that are less sensitive, for example,not prominent, and varied in character;

• areas that are not highly valued for theirexisting character;

• locations where natural topography can beused to screen development;

• locations where remnant vegetation cannaturally screen development;

• areas that may support vegetation screenplanting; and

• portions of the site able to supportscreening vegetation without blockingdesirable views to the site from nearbyviewpoints such as roads.

There is overlap between the visual significanceof natural features and value attributed on thebasis of ecological attributes. There is a similar

Image 92: Rural landscapes with diverse terrainand vegetation are more suited to additionaldevelopment than open, unvaried landscapes.

PART THREE


Number of lots and/or buildings

The number of buildings in a subdivision is a keyissue, as buildings are the most visible feature ofrural residential developments.

Preferably the location of potential buildingenvelopes should be agreed prior to subdivisionapproval, to ensure that each proposed lot has asuitable site.

The number of buildings visible over an entire siteshould resemble rural densities in the region, or atleast not appear to be substantially denser to thedegree that the appearance is considered moreurban than rural. Higher visible densities will lookmore appropriate close to urban areas.

A starting point in deciding on the number ofblocks is to consider how many buildings it isacceptable to see. The next step is to ascertainwhether the landscape is capable of obscuringthe balance of the number of buildings proposed.Factors such as screening potential should beconsidered, together with an assessment of theextent to which the strategies listed below can beused. Any requirement to screen particularbuildings should be made clear to prospectivepurchasers prior to sale of the lots, unless this isconsidered as a desirable but not essentialobjective that landowners are encouraged toobserve.

Rural residential development is likely to result ina more visually complex landscape, with a greaternumber of built features including buildings androads, and more variety of tree species. Naturalcomponents may be less prominent and lessobvious. Multiple ownerships may result in avariety of land management techniques andlevels.

This may contrast with an original landscape thatis simple and unified in character, with fewfences, buildings and tracks, under singleownership, with almost entirely local nativevegetation. The strategies described below aim toretain rural character where feasible; to keep thebasic characteristics of simplicity and a minimumof visible built structures.

These principles relate to components of ruralresidential development that have a visual impact.They refer to actions that would be takenassuming that the site was broadly acceptable.The visual management objectives may be eitherfor development to be not evident, or thatdevelopment should blend with the landscape.Where the objective for a site as a whole may befor blending of development, there are likely to beindividual components that are preferably notvisible from specified viewpoints. Most of thestrategies below would result in a developmentblending with its setting, rather than being entirelynot evident. Strategies for screening andobscuring development are addressed in Part 3:Introduction.

Line-o

f-sigh

t A

Line-of-

sight

B

Observer position A

Observer position B

Location in whichdevelopment wouldbe visible on theskyline, fromobserver position A

As above, fromobserver position B

Figure 3.1: Hypothetical hillsideprofile, illustrating locations in whichdevelopment would be visible on theskyline from several observerpositions. Note – from the closerobserver position, position B, land onwhich development would form theskyline is further down slope).

PART THREE


Some lots may only be the size of their buildingenvelopes, while the remaining areas may bemaintained in an undeveloped state, protected aspublic reserves or retained as common propertyunder the control and responsibility of thelandowners.

Use of strata titles or other similar form of title isanother means to ensure that landscape orenvironmental features are contained in commonland covered by specific bylaws or provisions thatcover such issues as:

• areas to be protected;

• level of protection required;

• objectives of protection;

• management and maintenance actionsrequired;

• specific responsibilities of the landownergroup;

• the degree of responsibility of eachindividual landowner, the group collectively,and any other groups of agencies whichhave a degree of right, responsibility orinterest in respect to the land; and

• the process involved in makingmodifications to those bylaws or provisions.

Clustered layout of lots leaves substantial areas ofopen space, which can be linked with adjoininguncleared public land to better integratedeveloped land into its setting. Corridors ofremnant vegetation may be located where theyprovide linkages between important landscapefeatures such as ranges, coastline, wetlands andestuaries. The obvious location for these linkagesis along watercourses, in addition to linking largeareas of remnant vegetation elsewhere.

Siting of buildings

Buildings or building envelopes should not belocated on important landscape features such asrock outcrops, knolls, dunes, areas of vegetationvisual interest such as heath or vegetation thatcontain visually distinctive individual species suchas WA Christmas trees, or grasstrees. Vegetation

There should be an acceptable time frame for thegrowth of any required screen planting. Screenvegetation may be planted in advance, based onknowledge of likely desirable building sites.

Lot size and subdivision layout

Lot size and layout should ensure that individuallandform features are incorporated in single lots,avoiding the need for fencing across or throughfeatures such as knolls or rock outcrops.

Subdivision layout should be designed to preventthe appearance of a regimented grid pattern,through road and driveway alignment, lot size,configuration of boundaries, and pattern ofplanted areas and likely building locations.

Lots need to be large enough to provide spacefor vegetation while still complying with fire safetyregulations. Each proposed lot should have ahouse site on which the house and its access-waywill be unobtrusive, depending on the visualmanagement objective.

It is sometimes suggested that smaller lots aremore visually attractive as they are easier forowners to maintain. People may be reluctant toplant trees close to their homes due to the risk offire or overhanging limbs breaking, and they maynot want to screen their views. The net result of anumber of adjoining land owners being reluctantto plant trees could be fewer trees over the entiresubdivision, compared to the number of remnantor planted trees if lots were larger. Smaller lots willhave proportionately less area outside buildingenvelopes and more of the entire site willcomprise buildings. Owners are less able to retainremnant vegetation, due mainly to the fireprevention regulations.

Smaller lots may be appropriate if they enable thecreation of some larger lots that contain protectivecovenants, or common land that incorporatesimportant landscape features. The concept ofclustering lots and/or building envelopes toprotect landscape values represents a flexibleapproach to rural residential design that can bebased on landscape assessment outcomes.

PART THREE


Panoramic views may be available from the top ofa scarp or ridge into an adjacent valley. Buildingsshould be kept to the sides of these valleys, out ofthe main view corridor. They should preferably bescreened from the more elevated viewpoints.Residents would retain their views down thevalley.

Buildings should preferably not be located in thefocal areas of views. If they are located in focalareas, the planting strategy should incorporatetree planting to screen development areas.

Buildings should not be visible on skylines,ridgelines or other highly visible locations in thesubdivision such as knolls and heads of valleys,and not silhouetted against the skyline fromsensitive roads and viewpoints.

valued for other reasons such as ecologicalsignificance should also not be located inbuilding envelopes.

Buildings need to be buffered from importantlandscape features, to ensure that they do notimpinge on these features through impacts suchas altered drainage patterns, soil erosion,introduction of weeds or increased frequency ofbush fires, all of which would adversely impact onvisual values.

The visual impact of buildings is reduced if theyare sited adjacent to existing vegetation, or inareas that are to be planted. Planting aroundbuildings near remnant vegetation can visuallyconnect them to this landscape feature.

Preferred building sites are those that are:

• in the vicinity of remnant vegetation,including parkland cleared sites;

• in open areas that have been or will berevegetated;

• in low positions in the landscape, or onfoot-slopes of ranges;

• in small, enclosed valleys; and

• at natural breaks in slope to minimise needfor cut and fill.

Buildings may be clustered to allow space forlarger, contiguous vegetated or agriculturalcorridors in between. Whether such areas are inprivate or public ownership is not important to theconcept. Clustered buildings may be easier toscreen in the landscape than isolated buildings.Clustering is an alternative to the appearance ofbuildings spread evenly across a landscape,possibly affecting a larger area.

Where building sites cannot be clustered they arebetter located at staggered elevations, rather thanin a straight line along a contour, or otherwise anew, very strong linear visual element may beintroduced into the landscape.

Standard lot layoutStandard lot layoutHouses at focal pointalong road anddispersed evenly acrossface of hillside

Houses on prominentforeground ridge

Clustered lot layoutClustered lot layoutNo development at focalpoint or on prominenthillside. Existingcharacter maintained

Developmentmostly obscuredby ridge

Maintenance of existingcharacter of prominentforeground ridge

Efficient layoutfor vegetationscreening

Figure 3.2: Clustering of rural residentialdevelopment enables development to beconcentrated in less visually sensitive portions of thesite, while the remainder maintains its existingcharacter or may be revegetated.

PART THREE


These objectives will contribute to choice ofbuilding site, building form, size, height, materialsand colours. If the objective for the entire site isthat the development should with its setting, it stillmay be appropriate for an individual building tobe not evident, to reduce the overall impact of thesubdivision.

The visual impacts of large terraced buildingpads with high retaining walls or exposed slopesbelow the house are difficult to address. Cut andfill techniques may be used to reduce the heightof building pads.

Building form needs to fit the landform, usuallyhorizontal rather than vertical. It may be easier tofit a series of smaller forms in to the landscapethan a single large one. The bulk of dwellings maybe broken up, for instance, by not incorporatingthe garage into the main body of the house.

Houses should be capable of being screenedfrom view from specified viewpoints, whileretaining desirable views from properties. It isacknowledged that landowners will want to buildwhere they maximise the views from the house. Itis usually possible to identify suitable buildingssites from which residents may obtain satisfactorypanoramic views, perhaps in a particulardirection, or framed by vegetation.

Building envelopes need to be of a practicalshape and position on the lot, to allow reasonableopportunities for landowners to develop theirproperty. They need to be of a size that allows fora permissible development to be sensitivelydesigned and placed, with space for a large ruralhome and a number of outbuildings. A range from2000 m2 to 4000 m2 is suggested, depending onindividual circumstances. Building envelopes alsoneed to be able to incorporate fuel-reducedbuffers or other bushfire protection measures. If itis not feasible for building envelopes to be largeenough to address these practical considerationsthen the design of the estate should be radicallymodified to cluster the lots or developablebuilding envelopes into selected areas where theaffect on landscape and vegetation can betolerated.

Even when the position and size of buildingenvelopes has been fixed, there needs to be adegree of flexibility to allow for modification orrepositioning. Owners should demonstrate thatthey will still achieve the established landscapeobjectives for the estate, as determined by acomprehensive visual impact assessment thatwould have been carried out prior to the initialapproval of the subdivision, together with theapplication of these guidelines.

Building design

Buildings should be designed to meet thesubdivision site’s overall visual managementobjective. The objective in relation to buildingsmay be: 1) buildings should be not evident; 2)buildings may be evident but should blend in, andnot be prominent in the landscape; or 3) buildingsmay comprise prominent features that contrastwith their visual landscape setting.

Image 93: Housing at Yallingup displays a range ofstyles that provide lessons for rural residentialhousing. For example, the house third from the rightfits into its setting better than other houses, due to itsdark roof and window treatment.

Image 94: Particular care is needed in the siting anddesign of ancillary structures in visually sensitivelocations, such as rural land adjacent to the StirlingRange. The curved form of this simple shelterreflects the curved profile of the range backdrop.

PART THREE


the fencing and firebreaks assist in vegetationprotection. Additional planting can then takeplace on the paddock side of the fence.

Firebreaks are less intrusive if they followcontours. They may also comprise a slashedbuffer strip, rather than exposed soil.

The least intrusive style of fencing is rural style,post and wire. Solid fencing near buildings looksless intrusive if darker colours and non-reflective,rough textures are used. Natural materials may beideal.

Access roads and driveways

Location and alignment

Roads and driveways should be positioned wherethey are not orientated towards key viewpoints.They may be prominent where located throughopen areas on slopes facing major viewpointssuch as adjoining roads. If the alternative locationwould involve vegetation removal, prominentroads could be placed at the edges of unclearedareas, with additional planting on the cleared sideof the road.

Use an alignment that follows contours or runsgently across slopes. Avoid steep slopes,drainage lines and areas requiring extensive cutand fill.

Roads and driveways that follow contours onsteep slopes result in a continuous cut above theroad and continuous fill below. In these locationsit may in fact be preferable to have a shortersection of road aligned upslope, if it can be donewhere it does not face major viewpoints andwhere drainage issues can be addressed.

The use of embankments and cuts should beminimised. They should look as natural aspossible, for example, in their slope andvegetation cover.

The entrance to rural residential subdivisionsshould not be permanently highlighted by entrystatements, as these are a feature that is typical of

Building height limits need to be low enough tohave a rural appearance and to allow screeningwhere required.

Rooflines should reflect the angle of slope of theskyline. The visual impact of inappropriaterooflines such as steep pitch or abrupt changescan be softened by vegetation planted around thebuildings, as plants redirect attention away fromthe buildings. Responsibility for such plantingneeds to be determined to ensure that it occurs.

Building materials should blend with the naturalcolours and textures of the landscape, such assoil colour, rocks and vegetation. Naturalmaterials such as rammed earth, cementstabilised gravel, timber, hay bales or field rockmay suit rural landscapes, as could traditionalmaterials such as iron sheeting. Recycledmaterials may also be appropriate.

Cream or white walls or bright colours should beavoided as they usually draw attention in rurallandscapes, by producing strong visual contrast.Colours or materials that may cause glare shouldbe avoided, as should colours that are bright,light or reflective. Verandas and eaves will reducereflectivity and glare by shading walls andwindows.

Ancillary structures such as sheds, garages andtanks should be of similar materials, colours andstyle to the main house, although the appearanceof a group of different looking structures can beunified by planting or a unified painting scheme.Structures have less impact if clustered together.

Fencing and firebreaks

It is preferable that fencing with associatedfirebreaks is not located in prominent positionssuch as at right angles up steep slopes. It may bepreferable to locate these fences in open areasrather than through bush remnants, to prevent theneed to clear vegetation either side of the fence.New planting can help to minimise the visibility offencing and firebreaks in open areas. The ideallocation may be at the edge of remnant bush, so

PART THREE


Use of the dominant local tree species in roadsideplanting may assist in unifying the appearance ofsubdivisions, as roadside trees are particularlynoticeable.

Vegetation may be used to screen driveways bybeing planted on the down-slope side.

Sewerage disposal, water supply, power

Underground power is preferable to aboveground, to avoid a proliferation of overhead wires.The ground needs to be rehabilitated andrevegetated following installation.

Placement of water storage tanks and sewagetreatment facilities may be an issue. Water tanksmay present particular problems if they need tobe located at the highest elevations of thesubdivision. Options may include sinking watertanks below the ground surface, and use ofscreen planting combined with painting to assistwith camouflage.

Tanks should not be located where they will beseen silhouetted against the skyline or be visiblefrom specified viewpoints.

Tank siting may be of sufficient concern to bringthis method of water supply into question.

Remnant vegetation and new planting

A strategic planting plan should be prepared foreach rural residential subdivision. This shouldaddress species and sites for planting, includingscreen planting and planting to reduce theprominence of individual buildings. Screenplantings and vegetated buffers may take manyyears to grow to an effective size, and it is difficultto predict how each individual specimen will grow.Plantings will need management to retain theireffectiveness and provision needs to be made toprevent their removal or partial destruction.Implementation and maintenance tasks andresponsibilities should be identified in relation toeach component of the planting plan.Maintenance may include watering until

urban, not rural, landscapes. Where it isnecessary to have kerbing, attention should begiven to strategies for reducing its prominence.Careful landscape treatment may assist in makingthese entry points attractive, but still rural andinformal in character.

Design considerations

Roads and access drives that are most visiblefrom a distance are gravel surfaces, with widegravel shoulders, deep surface drains, culvertsunder driveways, and no vegetation on shouldersor edges. These types of surface and vergetreatments should be avoided where visualprominence is an issue. Gravel surfaces generallyprovide a more rustic, typically rural appearance,but they are usually brighter or more reflective incolour than bitumen, unless a dark gravel materialis used.

The least visible roads and access drives arethose with a bitumen surface, no gravelshoulders, underground drainage and vegetationrestored to shoulders. Kerbing may be prominentdue to its light colour. However, tinted concrete, oruse of local rock, are possible solutions. Kerbingwith below-ground drainage may be beneficial asthe surface can be vegetated to the pavementedge.

The width of roads and access driveways shouldbe minimised to reduce their prominence.

Vegetation

Vegetation is often lost from the sides of accessroads and driveways as a result of soildisturbance, placement of underground cablesand power, and drainage construction. Attentionto housekeeping and revegetation would addressthese issues.

Canopied vegetation across roads or drivewaysshould be retained or introduced whereverfeasible. Groundcovers are also suitable forplanting on verges. Large shrubs may have safetyimplications, as well as blocking views.

PART THREE


Landowners should be provided with lists ofsuitable species to use in implementing thestrategic planting plan. They should also beprovided with information on attending to matterssuch as weeds escaping from gardens, andweeds in general.

Remnant vegetation

There should be no clearing other than asrequired eg in specified building envelopes, forroads and fire control purposes. However,clearing for these purposes should be avoidedwherever feasible by avoiding the location ofstructures or facilities in areas of remnantvegetation.

All remnant vegetation should be retainedwherever feasible, whether it comprises bushlandwith an understorey, parkland cleared vegetationwith no understorey, or simply scattered remnanttrees or shrubs.

Natural revegetation should be encouraged byfencing to restrain stock, especially alongdrainage lines, on steep slopes and ridgelines, inareas prone to soil erosion and salt scalding andaround rock outcrops. (If shade for stock is anissue, fast growing trees such as wattles may beplanted outside the fenced regeneration areas toprovide alternative shelter).

establishment, pruning and weed control. Plantswill take some years to become established,requiring a long-term commitment.

The objectives of the planting plan would be toensure that:

• planting looks natural where native plantsare used;

• planting includes areas in which vegetationrestoration would assist in addressingenvironmental degradation, such as onsteep slopes, around wetlands, and inriparian zones;

• the choice of species to be used takes intoaccount height, growth rate andcharacteristics likely to apply to thesespecies when planted in the particular soil,slope and climatic conditions of the site;

• trees chosen are suitable for being prunedas required eg to allow for views;

• plants intended to soften the impacts ofbuildings and other structures will grow tothe required dimensions and are locatedwhere they will achieve their landscapedesign objective; and

• screen planting:

- looks natural (for example, by use oflocal species, natural planting layout,varied ages and plant forms);

- is the required height and density;

- is accurately located to provide ascreen (also refer to strategies forscreening in Part 3: Introduction);

- screens views of houses while stillproviding desirable views from housesto landscape features;

- does not become an intrusive elementin itself; and

- does not inadvertently draw attentionto the built features which are to bemade less obvious.

PART THREE


Example of a procedure for undertaking a strategic planting plan for a hypothetical ruralresidential proposal:

• identify the key viewpoints which are to be considered in analysis, including major regionalvantage points from which the site is visible (such as lookouts), localised vantage points in whichthe site is a feature (such as bridges), and representative individual locations of views frompublicly accessible areas such as nearby roads;

• obtain digitised contour information, ideally incorporating all land between the site-and off-site keyviewpoints, but at least including the exact location of off-site viewpoints if there is no interveninglandform which obstructs views;

• produce digitised information on remnant vegetation both on-site and off-site on adjacent land;

• produce digitised information on the subdivision, including known elements such as lotboundaries, roads, location of the water storage tank, and likely location of variable features suchas buildings and access driveways;

• produce digitised information on maximum height of development features;

• develop three dimensional images incorporating all the above information, to indicate how thedevelopment would look from each of the key viewpoints;

• develop sets of visual management objectives to apply to each viewpoint, such as objectiveswhich address major negative features that are apparent from individual viewpoints, and thosefeatures which comprise the major constraints to meeting the overall objectives listed above;

• using the three dimensional computer images, develop a planting plan by trialling locations andheights of vegetation required to meet the objectives listed for each viewpoint (note that usingcomputer-generated images enables planting areas to be correctly located on the ground);

• once areas to be planted have been decided on, develop list of species to be used, taking intoaccount height, growth rate and characteristics likely to apply when grown on this site, density offoliage, colour of foliage, plant form and so on, with the specific objective of using local nativespecies wherever possible, but where plants from elsewhere are needed, to obtain the necessaryheight for example, these plants should be visually compatible with local native species growingnaturally near the site, in terms of their form, colour and texture; and

• prepare information on obtaining, planting and maintaining the recommended species.

Siting of vegetation to enhance landscapecharacter

Ridgelines may have lost their original vegetation,resulting in a loss of apparent ridge height. Torestore the prominence of these sections ofridgeline, trees should be planted along the top ofthe ridgeline itself. It is insufficient to have avegetated skyline comprising trees protrudingfrom behind the ridge. This can result in a verydistinct cleared ridgeline silhouetted against abackdrop of vegetation from behind the ridge.

Supplementary planting in adjacent clearedareas, using the same species as those thatdominate the bushland, can reduce the abruptedges to remnant vegetation. These plantededges are suitable locations for buildings, ratherthan in isolated locations in cleared spaces.

Existing remnant vegetation may besupplemented with additional planting in lots,such as along lot boundaries with additionalplanting inside these boundary strips, althoughonly planting along property boundaries results ina rigid and unnatural appearance.

PART THREE


PART THREE

Visual Management ObjectivesFor general site - The visual management objectives for the keyview point (bridge) are:

• to maintain current rural landscape character with some additional development acceptable;

• to enhance the skyline and creekline features by restoring vegetation;• to increase visual diversity with parkland planting.

For each house - House A - house to be completely screened from this view point

House B - top portion of house may be visible above tree canopy House C - filtered glimpses of house through scattered trees

Planting Strategies and Views from HousesHouse A - Vegetation restored on ridgeline to create vegetated skyline and backdrop. Extend remnant vegetation by planting in front of house. Views from house to right.House B - Vegetation restored along creekline. Additional planting between creek and house.

Views from house to left.House C - Scattered parkland planting downslope from house. Filtered views from house.

A

B

C

House Acompletelyscreened

Tops ofhouse B visible

Filtered viewsof house C

Line-of-sight

Line-of-sight

Line-of-sight

Keyview point

Keyview point

Keyview point

Profiles from key view point to each house

Creekline

CB

A

Key view point (bridge)

Figure 3.3: Hypothetical examples of the basic elements in a strategic planting plan for a ruralresidential development.

Planting with local trees may be used to reducethe prominence of open areas. Trees should belocated in groups or in a roughly linear patternalong watercourses, rather than in regimented,plantation-type shapes and layout.

Ensure that desirable views in, from and to thesite are not inadvertently blocked by planting.Views may be altered, for example, from openpanoramic views to canopied or partiallyenclosed panoramic views.

Use of non-local plants

It is probably considered acceptable for manyrural residential developments to exhibit morevegetation diversity than in typical rurallandscapes. Visually chaotic planting should beavoided by limiting the number of non-localspecies used. The visual dominance of keyremnant vegetation species should be retainedwithout them being overwhelmed by a widevariety of introduced species.


Plantations

Background

The term farm forestry is a generic term that refersto all trees grown for commercial or farmmanagement purposes on freehold rural land. Itincorporates both tree plantations andagro-forestry. The principles and guidelines in thissection focus specifically on plantations.Agro-forestry is discussed very briefly, howeversome plantation principles for minimising visualimpact may be applied to areas planted foragro-forestry purposes.

Tree plantations are defined as commercialplantings greater than 10 ha in area, eitherhardwood such as Tasmanian blue gum orsoftwood, comprising pine trees. Agro-forestryinvolves planting trees to be managed inconjunction with other agricultural activities suchas cropping or grazing. The general emphasis ison environmental or land-care benefits, althoughtrees may be harvested on a rotational basis aspart of a commercial exercise.

Pine plantations have been established andharvested in this state for over 100 years andhardwood plantations since about 1990. They arepredominately located in the lower west coast andsouthern coastal areas.

Hardwood plantations are generally harvested aschip logs after 10 years and the stumps allowedto regrow to create up to two further harvests afterconsecutive eight-year periods. Rapidly improvingrootstocks, and techniques for growing and siteselection have seen many of the initial sitesabandoned after the initial harvest and replantingbeing undertaken on new land.

Agro-forestry is more likely to be taken up inmoderate to low rainfall areas. A wide range oftrees is typically used, including eucalypts, pine,wattles and tagasaste.

Appropriate non-local species may include plantsthat are traditional to the area and are valued fortheir contribution to the rural landscape.

Non-local vegetation that strongly contrasts withlocal vegetation in colour or form may detractfrom the natural character of the landscape.

Plants that are non-local may be needed in orderto provide a screen of the required height ordensity. The species chosen should be visuallycompatible with local natives elsewhere on thesite, in terms of form, colour and texture, and of aspecies that will not become weeds.

Non-natives may be appropriate as a feature inassociation with cultural elements such asdriveways, groups of buildings, dams or intensiveagricultural uses such as horticulture andaquaculture, presuming that there is no objectiveto blend these into the landscape. This ispreferred to naturalistic or random planting ofnon-local species across the entire landscape,intermingled with local native species. Nativevegetation is seen to be linked to the landscapeas a whole, as opposed to non-local vegetation,which exhibits traditional cultural linkages.

PART THREE

Small to medium scale plantations can contributepositively to the kaleidoscope of rural visuallandscape experiences by providing additionalcolours and textures, but large scale plantationsare more likely to have a detrimental visual effect.In contrast to large plantations, agro-forestry isgenerally much more conducive to producing avaried rural landscape.



• Farm Forestry Planning Bulletin 56 (WAPC2003)


• Guidelines for Managing PlantationLandscapes (CALM 1994)

• Guidelines for Integrated Forest HarvestPlanning and Design (CALM 1994)

• Guidelines for Plantation Fire Protection(CALM & FESA 2001)

• Farm Forestry and Landscape Architecture:a feasibility study (Joint VentureAgroforestry Program) RIRDC PublicationNo. 04/187 (2004)

Visual elements

The elements below can apply to both plantationsand agro-forestry. Some of the elements applymainly to closer views such as shape of plots andthe appearance of each species, and aretherefore more relevant for consideration at a siteor local level than a regional level.

Visual elements to be considered comprise:

• shape of vegetated area;

• species appearance in relation to localnative vegetation;

• species variety;

• height and density of vegetation;

• planting pattern and/or layout;

• uniform shape of plantations;

• blocking major view sheds;

• obstructing key view locations fromimportant travel routes;

• siting and locations of plantations in thelandscape;

• height of plantation;

• species type;

• different shapes and colours; and

• impact of colour on local landscapes,particularly blue gums.


Plantations represent a significant change inagricultural land use in some regions. Thetransition has resulted from more intensiveagriculture replacing more extensive, traditionalbroad-scale agriculture.

Planting to create windbreaks, shelter-belts andso on for agro-forestry purposes can have long-term visual impacts, although its impacts are lessdramatic than plantations. Straight line plantingmay create new linear elements in specificlandscapes that did not previously contain stronglinear cultural elements, or existing lines createdby fencing and firebreaks may be accentuated,such as in the landscape immediately inland fromDongara. Care is also needed to ensure thatplanting does not create a hedge effect alongmajor routes, blocking important views.

Remnants of natural vegetation in plantationsrestrict planting, management and harvestingoperations, and may increase the likelihood offires, as properly managed hardwood plantationspresent a reduced fire risk.

When rural areas were first settled, crops andpasture resulted in major changes to thelandscape, primarily an opening up of thepreviously vegetated landscape. These changesoccurred some years ago, and the openappearance typical of rural landscapes has longsince become accepted.


PART THREE



Pine plantations have been a small-scalecommercial land use in WA for about a century;however the industry has been through a rapidincrease with hardwood plantations since about1990. This increase has led to a transition inagricultural land uses in the regional areas fromtraditional broad-acre farming practices to moreintensive agriculture such as viticulture,horticulture and plantations.

As this transition is occurring, planning at a locallevel is essential to accommodate this changeparticularly in regard to potential impacts on localvisual landscape character and tourism.

Plantations bring substantial changes to locallandscapes. Developing a good plantationproposal should protect significant landscapefeatures, maintain key views from important travelroutes and complement local visual landscapecharacter, particularly adjacent to important travelroutes.

Plantations result in a return to a more enclosed,vegetated landscape. This change may be quitedramatic, especially where plantations areestablished in open landscapes. Crops andpasture allow the surface details of the terrain tobe observed, including rock outcrops anddrainage systems, whereas plantations obscurethe terrain.

A major concern with plantations is the need toprotect significant landscape features andindividual landscapes where the current visualcharacter is highly valued, especially if theexisting character is a resource for the tourismindustry.

The screening of significant views of landscapefeatures as seen from major travel routes may alsobe an issue, for example, around the PorongurupRange. Road users may also be averse to thegeneral enclosure of roadside views in a narrow,uniform corridor of trees, even if major specificviews are not screened.

The use of narrow rural roads for heavy vehiclesservicing plantations is clearly a safety hazard,but there may also be detrimental landscapeimpacts, such as the loss of amenity when roadupgrades result in the clearing of roadsidevegetation.

Landscapes that are dominated by plantationsexhibit uniformity of land coverage, with small-scale natural terrain variations such as creek-linesand wetlands obscured from view.

Some phases of the harvest cycle are particularlyunattractive, such as when trees are freshlyharvested, leaving bare ground and stumps. Theuse to which land will be put following the finalharvest also needs to be considered.

PART THREE


Regional guidelines

• Ensure that existing valued character is maintained.

• Ensure that plantations do not dominate the roadsides of regionally important roads.

• Maintain permanent stands of trees or shelterbelts.

• Avoid burning close to important roads.

• Plantation size should borrow from the scale of the surrounding landscape, eg large open valleyscan accommodate a greater area of plantation establishment and harvest area than smaller ones.

• The pattern of plantation blocks should reflect or imitate surrounding vegetation, landform and landuse patterns.

Figure 3.4: Pattern of the plantation areas

PART THREE

• Plantation shape and edges should follow existing landscape lines, created by trees, creeks,gullies, spurs, ridges, roads, fences etc. Avoid reinforcing lines if they are inconsistent with thesurrounding landscape. For example, in a landscape setting that exhibits free flowing lines and hasdistinctive landform features, avoid straight vertical edges, breaking skylines, and reinforcingproperty and fence lines that are geometric in nature.

Figure 3.5: Plantation shape and edges

Note: Each figure is placed directly underneath the relevant principles


• Maintain, protect and enhance vegetation in major drainage lines to assist in the protection of thelandscape’s natural features.

Figure 3.8: Maintaining key views from travel routes

• Complement local visual landscape character, particularly adjacent to important travel routes anduse areas. Ensure that existing landscape character is well represented. Follow the visualexpression of the surrounding landscape. For example, in colourful, geometric, foregroundagricultural settings, the visual character of an exotic, regimented blue gum or pine plantationcould enhance the local landscape.

Figure 3.6: Remnant vegetation

Figure 3.7: Complementing local landscape character

• Maintain key views from important travel routes.

PART THREE


• Avoid over-emphasis of maximum visual contrasts such as changes located on treelines orskylines. Ensure that such contrasts are refected in other contrasts in the surrounding landscape.For example, in natural settings, edges of vegetation types can be softened by sympatheticboundary lines, gradual change in density or age class across the interface, or with the use ofspecies of different form, colour and texture.

Figure 3.9: Visual contrasts

Local guidelines

• Disperse cutting areas across the plantation area.

• Keep cutting areas small.

• Sequence establishment and harvesting to reduce the contrast between adjacent stands.

• Avoid sites which have cleared easements aligned towards major roads, such as power linecorridors.

• Use plantation buffer strips, harvested and established before (usually more effective) or after themain plantation stand.

PART THREE


• In landscapes of well-established agricultural land use patterns, plantation patterns may bestronger, for example, with geometric, regimented rows or belts.

• Side boundaries should be gently curving and on the diagonal. All boundaries should have anatural place to stop, such as a stream, existing vegetation and depression.

Figure 3.11: Plantations in more intensive agricultural areas

Remnantvegetation

X

X

Pines

Not artificial Follow natural lines

Pasture

Figure 3.10: Configuration of side boundaries

PART THREE


Gully to gully Not ridge to ridge X

Figure 3.12: Plantation siting in relation to topography

Access road tofollow contours

Access road to follow vegetation lines

Utilise screening

X

XAccess road contraststoo much with itssetting

Access roadsand fire breaks

Figure 3.13: Plantation access roads and fire breaks

• Establish plantation stands on a gully-to-gully basis, rather than ridge to ridge, to reinforce naturalline and form.

• Plantation access roads and fire breaks should be designed and constructed to have low visualimpact, preferably screened, with alignments following contours, existing road patterns, vegetationlines and so on, as opposed to artificial property boundaries.

PART THREE

• Ensure that plantations do not dominate the roadside corridor (approximately 300 m either side) ofimportant roads, where these roads provide valued views that would be screened.

Figure 3.14: Visual access

• Maintain or establish roadside vegetation corridors to reduce the visual impacts of adjoining clear-felled areas. Final harvesting of roadside vegetation should occur after surrounding coupes havebeen strongly regenerated or replanted to become a strong enough visual element.

• Naturally established vegetation should be retained in road reserves where possible.

• Reduce plantation impacts by enhancing and extending existing vegetation with similar speciesplantings. These plantings could be protected from future harvesting, thereby optimising wildlife,soil, water and recreation values. If harvested then the sequence and timing of cut should beseparate from the main plantation harvest schedule.


• Maintain or establish permanent stands of trees and shelterbelts.

4

44

4

1

1

22

22

2

3

3

32

Buffer

Buffer

Buffer

Buffer

Numbers indicate the order ofharvesting and regeneration

Figure 3.16: Roadside buffer strips

Roadreserve

PlantationShelter belt

Mixed densityplanting

Figure 3.15: Roadside shelterbelts

• Use plantation buffer strips, harvested and regenerated either before (usually more effective) orafter the main plantation stand.

PART THREE


Figure 3.17: Ridge-top plantations

Natural

Geometric

Figure 3.18: Thinning regimes

Site guidelines

• Maintain visual access through and into the plantation, to enhance the visual quality of theplantation landscape. This can be achieved by open or clumped planting density or throughthinning techniques.

PART THREE• For skyline edges, maintain ridges with species that typically dominate the surrounding landscape.

For example, avoid pines on ridges in a native hardwood forest setting. If pines are necessary thenlocate them below the skyline and vary their age, class and planting density.


• Thinning regimes should be non-uniform in landscape settings that look predominantly natural.Conversely, in geometric or culturally dominated landscapes, thinning regimes should beregular and uniform.

• Plantation debris can cause significant visual impacts. Reduce impacts by screening, burningor scattering debris away from seen areas in foreground views.

• Harvest areas should be of minimal size in relation to the overall plantation. Felled areas shouldnot dominate over unfelled areas. In sensitive areas, employ harvesting sequencing techniques.

• Disperse harvest areas over the plantation area and stagger the time of rotation. Keep harvestareas small.

Major road

1 2 211

Harvest coupesize unacceptable

Roadsidevegetation

Plantation sectionsequentially harvested

Harvest coupe sizeis acceptable

Figure 3.19: Harvest areas should be of minimal size in relation to the overall plantation

26

53

41

1 X

Figure 3.20: Dispersion of harvest areas

PART THREE


1st Harvest

2nd Harvest - Years later

Figure 3.21: Sequence of harvesting

Figure 3.22: Sequence establishment and harvesting

• Sequence harvesting of ridges or skylines to reduce the extent of clearing disturbance visible atany one time, or to enable adjoining areas to be successfully regenerated.

• Sequence establishment and harvesting to reduce the contrast between adjacent stands.

PART THREE


Agencies and groups

The utility towers guideline is intended for use inboth the development of proposals for towers andthe assessment of the visual impacts of towers.

Target user groups comprise industry and stateand local government agencies. These includemobile phone companies, the Department ofEnvironment, Department for Planning andInfrastructure, Western Power, Department ofEnvironment and Conservation (DEC) andSustainable Energy Development Office (SEDO).


This guideline should be used in conjunction withexisting policies and guidelines. It providespractical measures for taking visual landscapeinto account, as is generally required inoverarching policies and broad guidelines.

Wind farms

• AusWEA: Best practice guidelines forimplementation of wind energy projects inAustralia (2002).

• WAPC (2004) Guidelines for Wind FarmDevelopment – Planning Bulletin 67.

• Sustainable Energy Development Office(WA) Renewable Energy Handbook forWestern Australia (2006).

• SEDA: NSW Wind Energy Handbook (2002)

• Planning NSW: Draft NSW Wind Energy EIAGuidelines (2002).

• Sustainable Energy Authority Victoria:Policy and Planning guidelines fordevelopment of wind energy facilities inVictoria (2002).

• Planning SA: Planning Bulletin – WindFarms (2002).

• Australian Wind Energy Association andAustralian Council of National Trusts, WindFarms and Landscape Values: Stage OneFinal Report – Identifying Issues (2005).


Utility towers

Background

This guideline addresses the location, siting anddesign of towers erected for utilitarian purposessuch as power generation or transfer,telecommunications and lighting. Utility towersconsidered in this guideline comprise:

• wind farms;

• telecommunications towers;

• transmission lines; and

• other utility towers (eg tall light stands,water storage tanks, airport communicationtowers, nautical navigation structures).

While opinions differ, the principles and guidelinespresented below are based on the assumptionthat the community prefers that most types ofutility towers are not readily visible, or that theirvisibility should be minimised.

It is assumed that towers are least tolerated innatural landscapes and are more likely to beconsidered acceptable in rural landscapes.Towers that are located in built landscapes aregenerally smaller than in non-urban settings astheir scale may be considered too great for urbansettings.

Regardless of the visual prominence of utilitytowers, the community’s perception of theimportance of their function may impact on theirperceived visual impact and therefore on theextent of visibility that is acceptable. For example,towers designed to provide safety, includinglighthouses and airport control towers, may beperceived favourably. Wind turbines may beperceived favourably in communities in whichalternative energy is considered valuable. Publicsuspicion about potential health risks associatedwith mobile phone towers and power transmissionlines may result in these being less tolerated.Industrial stacks may be perceived negativelyother than in communities in which industry is aprime source of employment.

PART THREE

Telecommunication towers

• CALM Policy Statement No. 49 – RadioCommunications Facilities Policy (1993).

• WAPC 2004 – TelecommunicationsInfrastructure State Planning Policy 5.2.

• WAPC 2004 – Guidelines for the Location,Siting and Design of TelecommunicationsInfrastructure (complementary to StatePlanning Policy 5.2).

• WAPC 1997 – TelecommunicationsInfrastructure Planning Bulletin 22.

• WAPC 2000 – Applications forTelecommunications Infrastructure PlanningBulletin 46.

• Mobile Carriers Forum Local GovernmentAssociation Taskforce – Guidelines forLocal Government ACIF Code: Deploymentof Mobile Phone Network Infrastructure(2006).


Transmission lines

• Utility Providers Services Committee 2002 -Utility Providers Code of Practice.

• Western Power – Transmission Plans 2003 -2008 (5 year capital works plan).


Wind farms

Introduction

The principles of sustainability in WesternAustralia reflect the importance of balancingenvironmental, social and economic factors indecision-making. The challenge in wind farmdevelopments is to harness the wind resourceand to design each wind farm so that itappropriately balances environmental, economic,technical and social considerations.

Wind farms have a context which is perhapsbroader than that of other utility towers, forexample, while wind farms involve planning

issues at a local level which are similar to otherutility structures they also involve more globalissues such as climate change. In this context theplanning processes need to be cognisant of thebroad context while dealing with the localplanning considerations.

There are many planning and technical issuesthat need to be considered in planning for windfarm developments. Site selection for wind farmsis not only driven by wind resource asconstruction logistics, land tenure and access tohigh voltage transmission lines can have as greatan impact on viability. This lowers the number ofpotential sites available for such facilities and thisadds complexity to the planning process giventhe broader global drivers mentioned above.

Like all utility towers, wind farms could haveenvironmental effects and these also need to beconsidered in the planning process. Visualimpacts on landscape are one of the mostimportant considerations in planning for windfarms and have been the most controversial.While wind farms built in Western Australia aregenerally well accepted by communities, it islikely that as the number of wind farms increasecommunity objections based on visual groundsmay also rise.

This guideline addresses the visual impactconsiderations necessary for effective land useplanning involving wind farm developments.

The number of development applications for windfarms received by local authorities in WA hasrecently increased as a result of both changes tofederal legislation regarding the provision ofrenewable energy, and favourable climaticconditions. Prior to this wind farms were noveland limited in numbers with the result that a policyframework and scheme provisions have notconsistently been established at this stage, foruse across all local authorities.

As a result of the increasing number ofcompanies lodging development applications forwind farms in this state, the WAPC released itsGuidelines for Wind Farm Development (WAPC


PART THREE



This section of the guideline focuses on outliningthe visual impacts of wind farm developments,including visual impact issues, components ofwind farms that have potential impacts and theelements of landscape that will be affected. Thiswill outline the issues for consideration forproponents and relevant agencies to conduct theappropriate assessments required and adhere tositing and design principles for regional, local andsite level issues (outlined in the following section).

When planning for a wind farm proposal the aimis to minimise potential impacts where possible byestablishing and identifying visual criteria andmanagement objectives.

Coastal sites selected for wind farm proposals inWA warrant specific attention as the coastline hassignificant landscape values that justify the needfor this guideline. The coast is a primary resourcearea for wind farms due to the typically highwinds. Currently the greatest interest for coastalwind farms is for sites either close to wind energymarkets (for example regional centres such asEsperance, Albany, Geraldton and Augusta) orclose to existing power infrastructure that linksinto the main power grid.

Wind farms in coastal locations are likely to bemore closely scrutinised by communities ratherthan those in inland areas. Coastal sites are oftenprominent with vegetation that is low in height.The siting and design of coastal wind farmsneeds to be undertaken with careful attention tolandscape and visual impacts.

A major siting issue for coastal wind farmsappears to be whether to optimise turbine sitesfrom the perspective of nearby residents (forexample with fewer, larger turbines closer to thecoastline as at Sand Patch, Albany) or to givepriority to recreational users of the coast, possiblyresulting in a larger number of smaller turbinesfurther from the shoreline (for example, CoronationBeach, north of Geraldton).

Planning Bulletin 67 2004). This planning bulletinprovides the planning context for this guideline.

Based upon visual impact assessment workalready completed in WA for various sites (forexample Esperance, Albany, Emu Downs, ScottRiver) and in the eastern states (for example, BaldHill and Wonthaggi); as well as visual impactguidelines established in NSW, Vic and SA, thisguideline is aimed at establishing consistencyand a precedent for any future wind farmproposals in Western Australia.

Existing and proposed wind farms in WA apply tonatural, rural and built landscape types.Examples of wind farms occur in each landscapetype, in areas such as Albany (natural),Dandaragan (rural) and Fremantle (built). Visuallandscape assessments need to take account ofthese different landscape types, as well asimplications regarding site selection in regional,local and site-specific contexts.

Visual elements

The components of wind turbines that may havean impact on the surrounding landscape andvisual character comprise:

• wind farm project area;

• layout of wind farm;

• turbine size (tower height and rotor size);

• turbine rotational speed;

• number of turbines;

• colour of turbines;

• reflectivity of rotating blades;

• access roads;

• ancillary features including associatedbuildings, signage, telecommunicationsinfrastructure and transmission lines;

• extent of clearing required (eg vegetationremoval);

• construction procedures; and

• rehabilitation measures.

PART THREE


Wind resource is higher in elevated areassuch as:

• ranges;

• hilltops;

• escarpments;

• ridgelines; and

• close proximity to the coast.

Inland areas:

• flat open plains can increase wind speed;and

• vegetation and landform can hinder windspeed.

Factors affecting the choice of site that mayimpact on landscape:

• high wind resource;

• access to transmission lines;

• access to land (tenure, Native Title andconstruction logistics); and

• existing road infrastructure for transportmovements.

Site selection is very important in terms ofmaximising the wind resource as well as reducingthe impact of the wind farm on the surroundinglandscape as much as possible.

Wind farm proposals require consideration at astate, regional, local and site level.

State issues:

• energy policy and the need for renewableenergy.

• state strategies are required for theappropriate location of wind farms.

Regional issues:

• proposals in regionally importantlandscapes;

• proposals affecting regionally importantlandscape features; and

• cumulative impact of several wind farms inone area.

Important viewing locations to consider in relationto coastal wind farm proposals include siteswhere people spend time observing theirsurroundings such as beaches, near-shorewaters, car parks overlooking the coast andlookouts at headlands.

Visual impact and landscape issues:

• site selection;

• landscape assessment at the appropriatescale of application (state, regional, local,site);

• identification of significant landscapecharacter;

• visual impact assessment of wind farmcomponents;

• visibility and sensitivity of the developmentsite;

• development of individual wind farm sitingand design guidelines; and

• community consultation.

Landscape components potentially visuallyaffected:

• landscape character (topographicvariation, presence of vegetation and waterform);

• natural areas and features (eg ridgelines,valleys, waterfalls, rivers);

• land use character (including compatibilityof existing and future land uses);

• sensitive coastal areas; and

• changes in future land use (eg proposedareas for future urban development).

Other considerations:

Factors affecting the availability of wind resourcethat may affect landscape:

• topographic variation;

• distance from the ocean; and

• surrounding vegetation.

PART THREE


• Encourage the location of wind farmdevelopments to be greater than 15 kmfrom major vantage points (eg regionalviewing platforms, significant land forms).

• Take into account the cumulative impact ofother wind farms located in the region. Thiswould involve the combined size and areaand combined siting and design principles.

• Remoteness to the main power grid shouldbe avoided to reduce the amount ofadditional infrastructure required forconnection (eg transmission lines, pylons,access roads).

• The decision-making process by which thelocation of the wind farm is determinedneeds to achieve a balance between usinghigh wind resources and minimising visualimpacts in regionally significantlandscapes.

• If high wind resources exist in significantlandscapes then alternative sites should beconsidered for suitability.

• Avoid location of wind farms wheresensitive skylines may be visuallydisrupted.

• Utilise existing infrastructure wherepossible so that construction for gridaccess does not compromise the regionalcharacter of an area (Image 96).

Local level

• Visibility from key view points (includingroads and recreation sites) should beminimised as much as possible.

• Height of the overall wind farm in relation toheight of turbines and topographicelevation need to be balanced to reduceoverall visibility.

• Effect of distance must be considered inlocating the wind farm in terms of thevisibility of detail in the site and thestructures it contains.

• The layout (eg grid pattern or clustered) ofthe wind farm should take into account theexisting visual landscape character

Local and site issues:

• site selection;

• site-specific layout and design of the windfarm; and

• community and stakeholder consultation.

Once the wind farm has been established,immediate commissioning of the turbines takesplace. This involves a series of tests relating toissues such as turbine performance, transmissionaccess and noise.

When decommissioning takes place, thecontractors or land managers have to ensure thatthe landscape and surrounding environment isrehabilitated to its original condition. This involvesrevegetation, site rehabilitation to restore the pre-existing topography to avoid soil erosion andchanges to surface water runoff. This in effect willrestore the pre-existing landscape quality as wellas address environmental issues.


State level

• Use existing renewable energy policies,guidelines and incentives that avoid limitingpotential wind farm sites to a few locationsonly.

• Adhere to such guidelines and policies thatconsider the impact upon the visuallandscape character that may besignificant at a state level.

Regional level

• Encourage wind farm development in rurallocations with compatible land uses (egexpansive crop areas) and flat terrain.

• Locating wind farm developments in flatterlandscapes would more likely reducevisibility due to shortening the visualperspective of the structures and thelikelihood of obstruction (ie naturalscreening).

PART THREE


• Access roads must be constructed withminimal clearing of vegetation and shouldfollow the natural contours of the landscape(ie cross ridges along, rather than up anddown the contours) to minimise their overallvisibility.

• Access roads should avoid straightalignment and be responsive to land formand other landscape features.

• Reduce visual impact of additionalinfrastructure such as transmission lines,access roads and visitor facilities such asinformation kiosks, car parks and viewingplatforms by using appropriate siting anddesign guidelines that are complementaryto the surrounding visual landscapecharacter.

• Additional infrastructure for tourism facilities(if required) should be developed to caterfor the predicted number of visitors and togive consideration to the capacity of thelandscape to carry such facilities.

• Where possible, site turbine towers againsta skyline background rather than landformbackground.

• Avoid turbines cutting across differentlandscape types and elements; try and sitethe turbines with in one landscape typewhere possible.

(vegetation, waterform, landform and landuse) and any variation in the topography ofthe site (Image 97).

• The number and size of the turbinesrequire assessment for compatibility withthe visual landscape character of an area.

• The number and size of the turbinesrequire assessment for the impact on thearea potentially visually affected.

• Avoid cluttering turbines along major viewcorridors.

• Any extensions to the power grid shouldconsider the visual impact on the locallandscape character and preferenceshould be given to underground powerlines.

Image 95: Turbines located in flatter terrain.

Image 96: These wind turbines at Shark Bay blendwith existing infrastructure of a radio tower,powerlines and signage.

Image 97: Sand Patch wind farm (Albany) reflectssiting and design principles that account for thenatural topography of the area (courtesy of RolshProductions, Western Australia).

PART THREE

• The size of cleared areas at the base of theturbines should be minimised to reduceimpact (Image 100).

• Avoid advertising or logos on the turbines.

• Ensure that lighting for the wind farm site isnon-obtrusive when viewed from anyresidential areas that are in close proximity.


Site Level

Wind farm structure

• Individual turbines and structures shouldbe appropriately coloured to minimiseimpact, which requires detailedassessment. The use of more than onecolour, or uniformity in colour, may beappropriate subject to the development siteand its surrounds.

• The number and size of turbines should besubject to the visual absorption capabilitiesof each individual development site andlocal community preference(ie either larger turbines and smaller innumber, or smaller turbines and larger innumber) (Image 98).

• Prevent blade glint and flicker, thereflection of sun off rotating blades, throughthe use of non-reflective materials.

• Avoid mixing tower and turbine types in adevelopment site (ie uniformity in design,number of blades, rotational direction andblade to tower aspect ratio) (Image 99).

• Individual turbines should be sited off thetops of ridgelines, vantage focal points andprominent locations where possible.

• Wind turbine pad construction should avoidthe creation of fill slopes, and should beconstructed by cut. Fill requires removalfrom the site.

Image 98: Using larger, but fewer turbines mayreduce their impact in an open, simple landscape.

Image 99: Uniformity of the tower and blades iseffective in giving the overall turbines a simpleappearance.

Image 100: Sand Patch wind farm (Albany) displaysminimal clearing at the base of the turbines.

PART THREE

• Heights of buildings should be minimisedwhere possible, and placed beneathridgelines.

• Roof forms of buildings should avoidprominent landform ridges, designed tominimise visual bulk and avoid sharpangles.

Power connection

• Promote the use of underground cablingfor power connection to the grid wherepossible, but ensure minimal impact onhighly vegetated areas during construction.Rehabilitation of earthworks and vegetationshould be undertaken to re-establish thenatural form of the landscape prior toconstruction of underground cabling.

• Where overhead cabling is used, minimiseimpact on the surrounding landform bydesigning the powerlines to follow thenatural land contours (ie gullies or valleys)and be coloured to blend with thecharacter of the site.

• Overhead powerlines should avoidtraversing highly vegetated areas.

• Overhead powerlines should be sitedbelow ridgelines where possible.

Rehabilitation

• Vegetation that has been removed or cutduring construction should be retained andreused on rehabilitation areas wherepossible.

• All temporary access roads and tracks tobe fully rehabilitated with fill andrevegetated to re-establish the natural landfeatures that existed prior to construction.

• The edges of newly established accessroads to be revegetated to minimiseimpact.

• Construction depot and other temporarystructures to be removed and the area tobe fully rehabilitated with stockpiledearthworks and vegetation.


Vegetation, earthworks and access

• Minimise clearing and damage tovegetation during construction wherepossible.

• Vegetation edges resulting from removalduring construction should refect theexisting local patterns.

• Access roads should have minimal visibilityand width.

• Avoid high colour contrast of access roadmaterials.

• Access roads should traverse as low aspossible on slopes and follow existing landcontours.

• Reduce visual impact of earthworks duringconstruction by minimising cut and fillwhere possible.

• Ensure that fill is not pushed up onto anysloping areas.

• Avoid the movement of soil from one areato another.

• Edges of earthworks should be of gentleslope and reflect the surrounding landform.

• Allow for the removal of soil from theturbine pad sites and other areas that havesteep slopes.

• Allow for the stockpiling of topsoil for areasthat will require rehabilitation, as well as thepromotion of using local materials for thesite.

Buildings and other structures

• Minimise visual impact of ancillarybuildings, structures, signage and lookoutsby using site-sensitive design, whereheight, colour, form and line arecomplementary to the surrounding visuallandscape character.

• Colour of ancillary structures should not beof high contrast, and surface finishesshould be non-reflective.

PART THREE


the endorsement of the TelecommunicationsInfrastructure State Planning Policy 52 (WAPC2004).

Telecommunication towers are generallyperceived as structures that are necessary fortoday’s fast moving society. However, communitypreference is that the towers be camouflaged,coloured or sited with similar visual infrastructure.There is a substantial amount of perceptionresearch that indicates that communities dislikeutility towers for aesthetic reasons. This is usuallyin regard to their height, size, incompatibility withsurrounding land uses and the general visualclutter that is associated with them.

This section addressing telecommunicationtowers includes the following utilities:

• mobile phone towers; and

• radio and television transmission towers.

Visual elements

The components of telecommunication towers thatare likely to affect the surrounding landscape andvisual character comprise:

• location of the tower;

• height of the tower;

• additional structures on the tower;

• visible bulk of the structure; and

• colour of the tower.


There are several issues that relate directly to thesiting and design of telecommunication towers.

Location and siting of mobile phone towers:the number of mobile phone towers are increasingrapidly. There has been a perceived consensusamong local communities that although moretowers are required, there needs to be more careby the companies in regard to the location andsiting of the towers.

• Create screening (if necessary) byselective planting. Opportunities forplanting at selected locations on certainroads, or at specific locations to createforeground closure or visual buffers in orderto screen portions of the wind farm thatotherwise may be visible from othervantage points. Negotiation with localauthority, other relevant agencies and localresidents is required (if planting is to bedone off-site).

• Implement a reinstatement programme forplanting and other associated landscapeworks to ensure that the short, medium andlong-term impact of the development isminimised.

Telecommunication towers

Introduction

The importance of telecommunications services inWestern Australia is recognised in the WAPCState Planning Strategy that advocates theprovision of an effective statewidetelecommunications network in a mannerconsistent with the state’s sustainability objectives(environmental, economic and social planningobjectives).

Over the previous 15 years mobiletelecommunications have increased to every dayuse for Western Australians, leading to a largeincrease in mobile phone towers. There are manystyles and designs of mobile phone towers thataccommodate for additional elements that areattached to the mobile phone tower itself.

Prior to the 1990s Australia only had onetelecommunication carrier and since then theindustry was deregulated following theTelecommunications Act 1991. This allowedalternate carriers to construct facilities on anyarea of land or other structures (includingbuildings) however State planning andenvironmental legislation had not included suchfacilities in the Act. This has been resolved with

PART THREE


Design of mobile phone towers: the design oftowers can produce contention, especially if thetowers are bulky with additional structures. Colourdoes not appear to be a design option with therecently constructed towers.

Structures installed on roofs of existingbuildings: additional structures appended tobuildings (on top of, or at the side of) tend to bevisually intrusive. Design and placement of suchstructures on buildings is most important.

Prominent locations: telecommunication towersare often located prominently in the landscape,for example on hilltops, ridgelines, escarpmentsor in long view corridors, to maximise reception.

Camouflaging towers: disguising mobile phonetowers as pine trees, palm trees or chimneys hasoccurred in the past, in Australia and particularlyin other parts of the world. There have been localproposals for such designs.

Inappropriate scale: structures may beconsidered out of scale with their surroundings.For example, mobile phone towers sited on roofsof service stations and other service buildingsmay be disproportionate in height in reflection tothe surrounding landscape.

Inappropriate general location: structures maybe considered foreign to their landscape setting.For example, towers in natural landscapescharacterised by low vegetation such as coastalheath.

Multiple towers in one location: differenttelecommunication companies appear to bereluctant to use the same structure, resulting inmultiple towers in the same location.

Ancillary facilities: any additional facilities mustbe consistent with any siting and designguidelines for the telecommunication towerproposal, to ensure the maintenance of thesurrounding visual landscape character.


There are many strategies that can mitigatelocation, siting and design issues in regard to theconstruction of telecommunication towers.

Location

• Assess the potential location of the towerand comply with management standardsfor the area.

• When locating and sitingtelecommunication towers avoid significantfeatures, travel routes and recreation areaswhere possible.

• Locate towers where there is similarinfrastructure in the surrounding landscapeand proposed construction area.

• High points in the landscape vary in theirprominence as viewed from differentlocations. Where possible choose higherpoints that appear less prominent from keyviews and/or travel routes.

• To reduce impacts on key views, there aretwo options: locating further up a slope isbetter for short distance views, and for longdistance views choose locations back fromthe top of the ridge or further down theslope (Figure 3.24).

PART THREE

Figure 3.23: Avoid siting telecommunication towerson the shoulders of the high points.

Source: CALM (2001)

Avoid siting onthe shouldersof high points


Siting

• Avoid siting towers directly on a focal area(ie the focus of the view), particularly wherethey are in line with travel route line-of-sight(Figure 3.25).

• Keeping the towers away from potentialfocal areas will reduce the overall visualimpact (Figure 3.26)

• Towers that are sited sufficiently away fromtravel routes can be completely screenedfrom view. This is possible and is the mostdesirable option (Figure 3.27)

• Minimise the height of the tower byassessing the local topography or height ofbuildings for the proposed area. Choosethe site that minimises the height of thetower most effectively (Figure 3.28).

• Siting telecommunication towers close toobjects of a similar scale (whether they arenatural, such as trees, or built featuressuch as other infrastructure) will reducetheir prominence and hence their potentialvisual impact (Figure 3.29).

Figure 3.24: Short and long distance views.

Source: CALM (2001)

Better for shortdistance views

Better for longdistance views

Figure 3.25: Avoid locating towers directly in thefocus of the view.Source: CALM (2001)

Figure 3.26: Keep towers away from direct focalareas.Source: CALM (2001)

Figure 3.27: Use existing vegetation to screentowers from focal views.Source: CALM (2001)

Figure 3.28: Use local topography to reduce theoverall height of towers.Source: CALM (2001)

Figure 3.29: Locate towers close to existing featuresof a similar scale.Source: CALM (2001)

PART THREE


• Siting towers on existing buildings; thereare many designs and strategies to sitetowers on existing buildings to reduce theoverall visual impact.

Design

• Use an appropriate colour scheme toharmonise with the surrounding landscapein any given situation (natural, rural, builtareas) (Image 101).

• Using colour will reduce glare andreflectivity. If the towers are not painted, thesteel is more reflective in the light and willdraw more attention.

• Avoid clutter on individual towers. Combineall additional elements in the moststreamlined way possible (Figure 3.30).

• Combine several towers that are in thesame location. This avoids duplication andconsolidating the facilities on to one towerreduces the overall visual impact onmultiple towers in one location(Figure 3.31).

• Reduce the visible bulk of the entirestructure. Lattice web towers are usuallyless intrusive than solid towers. Thisapplies with wide to slim design towers(Figure 3.32).

• In regards to the overall design oftelecommunication towers, check heightrequirements in the proposed construction

Image 101: This telecommunication tower locatedjust before the Narrows Bridge in Perth isharmonised with its setting by being colouredcomplementary green.

Figure 3.30: Avoid clutter that is not streamlined withthe tower.Source: CALM (2001)

PART THREE

Figure 3.32: Reduce the visible bulk of the tower.Source: CALM (2001)

Figure 3.31: Combine several towers into one, toreduce visual clutter.Source: CALM (2001)

area. Towers can often come in standardsizes and may be taller in height thannecessary. Minimise height whereverpossible.

• Camouflage towers: this technique ispopular, and if designed sensitively can bevery effective in reducing potential visualimpact (Images 102 and 103).


across several landscape types. The proposedroutes are usually assessed at a regional scale.

Previous studies show that community concernexists when new proposals are developed fortransmission line routes, due to their size (thetowers) and length (the route). As the towerstraverse a long distance, communities in differentregions and urban areas may be affected.

Visual elements

The components of transmission lines that wouldbe likely to affect the surrounding landscape andvisual character:

• transmission line route;

• transmission line corridor;

• height of the towers;

• design of the towers;

• colour of all transmission line components;

• transformers;

• conductors;

• wires;

• ancillary components (substations); and

• easements (vegetation clearing).


Selection of the transmission line route andcorridor: the choice of the route and corridor fora new transmission line proposal is based uponplanning restraints, and the capacity of thelandscape types to carry transmission lines. Thesignificance of these criteria will vary greatly fromone area to another, and will vary betweendifferent communities.

Land use conflict: as transmission lines traverseseveral landscape types, conflict regardingdifferent land uses may arise. The types of landuses that the proposal may traverse will be adeterminant for the extent of visual impact.

Size and height of the overall utility structure:transmission line developments are very large andrequire careful consideration when planning thedesired route.

Transmission lines

Introduction

Transmission lines are a large utility structure thatwill inevitably have a visual impact on thelandscape it traverses through.

There are many environmental impacts to beconsidered with proposals for new transmissionline routes. The focus of this guideline is toaddress visual impact, and it may be consideredthat the actual impact on the ground is greater asthe towers themselves are elevated above thelandscape surface.

This utility land use exists in rural, natural andbuilt landscapes. Transmission line routes usuallyspan over many kilometres in length and traverse

Image 102: This car wash in Doubleview haseffectively camouflaged the mobile phone structureson the top of the building.

Image 103: The art-deco Windsor Theatre inNedlands is another good example of effectivecamouflage of mobile phone towers. Equipment islocated within a false extension to the tower.

PART THREE


• Alignment (line): transmission lines shouldrun parallel to the contours of the land (iechanging direction with the scale and flowof topographic change).

• Alignment (line): where the lines cannotavoid cutting across major land useboundaries the impact of the transmissionlines passing from an open landscape toan enclosed landscape should beminimised by alignment choice andscreening the point of entry withappropriate vegetation.

• Routes should avoid crossing elevatedareas at right angles to contours especiallywhere the easement is centred on ahillcrest; this draws attention to theeasement. The line running against thenatural pattern of the landscape becomesintrusive.

• Locate the towers at the edge of a valley: ifsited in the centre of a valley, focus isdrawn to the transmission line. Towersshould be placed below the crest of a hillor horizon line that reduces the impactsagainst the skyline (Figure 3.33). Scenicviewpoints may be affected in such asituation.

• Avoid road intersections: they require openviews for safety, they receive high attentionfrom motorists and it is very difficult toreduce the impact once placed at roadintersections.

• Access roads for construction andmaintenance require careful siting anddesign, otherwise attention willautomatically be drawn to the easement.

• Where specific landscape types and landuse are dominant, the route should runparallel to the land use and in a similardirection; the edge of the landscape typeor land use will provide a suitablebackground for the easement, whileproviding easy access for maintenance.

• Where a transmission line crosses ahighway, or any road, the alignment should

Length of transmission lines as they passthrough different landscapes, issues arise asdifferent visual management objectives need tobe accounted for in one proposal.

Transmission lines in prominent locations: theymay be especially visible where they are locatedon ridges, escarpments, across valleys, across orparallel to roads.

Width of transmission line corridor: the width ofthe corridor to contain the transmission linerequires careful consideration, as this will directlyaffect the extent of clearing required.

Clearing for access: transmission lines inparticular are likely to be located in corridors inwhich all substantial vegetation has beenremoved. In natural landscapes this may createvisual impacts such as soil erosion and damagedvegetation.

Components of the transmission linedevelopment: the siting and design of the towers,wires, conductors and transformers are animportant part of assessing the extent of visualimpact.


• Route and corridor analysis: this must beundertaken to ensure that the route andcorridor of the proposed transmission lineis determined using the outcomes of avisual impact assessment as well as otherenvironmental assessments.

• Assessment of alternative routes (includinguse of existing corridors): identification of anumber of alternative routes will be anotheroutcome of the visual impact assessment.These should be explored and assessedagainst each other to determine the routethat has the least visual impact.

• Alignment (land use boundaries): theeasement must protect the character ofeach landscape area that forms the edgebetween different landscape types and/orland use types.

PART THREE


• Siting transmission lines along or next towater forms such as streams, rivers andlakes is not encouraged. Streams andrivers have a non-conforming linear shapethat is not complementary to the straightlinear nature of transmission lines. Lakes orwater bodies should be avoided in terms ofrecreation and visual impact, as thereflective nature will magnify the presenceof transmission lines.

• The visual impacts of the easements areincreased if placed near buildings andhouses due to the comparison betweentheir relative sizes.

• The design of the individual transmissiontowers should reflect the surroundinglandscape as much as possible. There aremany designs for transmission towerswhere alternatives and options areavailable (Figure 3.34).

be as perpendicular as possible to allowfor maximum setbacks of towers for lowvisibility from the highway or road.

• Existing vegetation should be retainedwhere possible to be used as foregroundscreening, and to provide a backdrop forthe transmission line alignment. Foregroundscreening can block the view of theintrusive upper portion of towers.Background screening such as trunks andbranches can assist in reducing the overallvisual impact of the tower webs (ie polesand wires).

• Alignments should consider possible futurepatterns of growth (ie proposed urbandevelopment).

• Joint use of the easement corridor foradditional utilities (road, railway, gas andelectric) is often encouraged to reduce thevisual impact of having several easements.

Line-of-sight

line-of-sight

5k m +0.5 - 2.5 km500 m0

Line-o

f-sigh

t

Figure 3.33: Towers should be placed below the crest of a hill or horizon line to reduce the impactsagainst the skyline.

Source: Grierson (1994)

L12 D Tower360 m Span

L12 D Tower300 m Span

Folded PlateTower

360 m Span

Folded PlateTower

300 m Span

L12 LD Tower310 m Span

Low Height GantryTower

310 m Span

Figure 3.34: Many designs for transmission line towers are available.

Source: Grierson (1994)

PART THREE


• Avoid bisecting areas that have potentialfor future urban development as aneasement slicing through a cohesive landunit prevents harmonious expansion andcan cause conflict between land uses.

• If vegetation is cleared for an easementthen the natural form and placement of thevegetation needs to be maintained, thetrees and shrubs should appear to flowthrough and counter to the alignment of theeasement. The land use can continueunderneath the lines without a break.

• Easements can form an appropriate bufferbetween different land uses such asextractive, agricultural or forestry uses.

• Screening: dense trees are more effectivethan open heath or scrub.

• Construction: ensure during constructionthat vegetation removal and access isundertaken carefully to minimise visualimpact.

• Any additional works such as newsubstations, conductor and/or transformerreplacement require consideration forassessment depending on scale ofadditional works.

• Produce transmission line route alternativesin light of impact upon visual landscapecharacter; including using existing utilitycorridors, rail and road reserves, as well ascreating new corridors.

Other towers

Proposals for other types of towers that may alsorequire visual impact assessment:

• wastewater treatment stacks;

• industrial chimneys;

• water storage towers;

• water storage tanks;

• airport control towers;

• banks of large light towers; and

• navigation beacons and lighthouses.

PART THREE


Agencies and groups

State and local agencies, and other groupsassociated with the uses covered in this guidelinetopic include:

• Chamber of Minerals and Energy;

• Department of Industry and Resources;

• Chamber of Commerce and Industry;

• CSIRO Exploration and Mining;

• Department of Environment andConservation;


• Main Roads WA;

• Department of Local Government andRegional Development; and

• The Minerals Institute of WA.

It is recognized that the guidance provided belowmay not be feasible on the grounds of costimplications and practical operational needs. Theextent to which recommended principles areapplied will depend on decisions reached bycontrolling agencies and may reflect the degreeof likely community concern, which in turn relatesto the sensitivity of each site.


The guideline should be used in conjunction withrelevant existing policies and requirements. Itprovides practical assistance in implementingpolicies and broader guidelines. A number oftechnical guidelines provide advice onrehabilitation of disused mines and quarries.Those listed below focus on visual aspects ratherthan ecological or pragmatic aspects such asincreasing germination rates, although there isclearly an overlap.

• Environmental management of quarries:development, operation and rehabilitationguidelines, Department of Minerals andEnergy (1994)

Mining and industry

Background

This guideline addresses the location, siting anddesign of mines, quarries and extraction pits(including roadside borrow pits, gravel pits, sitesfor extracting limestone, limesand and sand),industry and waste landfill sites.

It is assumed that the general communityconsiders these uses to be unattractivelandscape features and considerable effort istypically put into rehabilitating and screeningthese sites. People whose livelihoods depend onthese uses or live in nearby communities are notlikely to find them offensive. Certainly night viewsof well-lit industry may be considered attractive,and large open pit mines may be of interest totourists.

Government guidelines reflect assumptions aboutpublic preferences. For example, the 1994 quarryguidelines produced by the Department ofMinerals and Energy states that ‘it is importantthat unattractive elements such as bare soil, rock-faces and intrusive buildings are softened orhidden by topographic and vegetative screening’.The Department of Minerals and Energy 1994quarry guidelines are to be revised by theDepartment of Industry and Resources toenhance the guidelines by addressing currentvisual amenity issues.

It is recommended that development proposalsfor mining and industrial land use discuss andproject the potential cumulative visual impactsof progressive stages of development throughinception to closure and rehabilitation.

PART THREE

• Coal Mines and Associated InfrastructureEIS Guideline, Department of Urban Affairsand Planning, NSW (2000)

Visual elements

Any principles or specific guidelines foraddressing visual management objectives orissues should focus on those components of eachland use that have a direct visual impact. Thoselisted below relate to the specific nature of theland uses in question. Aspects that apply to anyland use, such as the visibility of the site, distancefrom viewpoints or changes to landscapecharacter, are covered by application of the visualimpact process outlined in Part 2.

Mines and quarries:

• size of footprint;

• depth;

• configuration of outer boundary;

• angle of faces;

• length of time faces are exposed beforebeing re-contoured and re-vegetated;

• time sequence for planting exposedsurfaces;

• planting programs, including screenplanting;

• siting, design and maintenance of plantand buildings;

• location of powerlines, pipelines and otherservices;

• alignment and design of access roads andrail links;

• changes to original landscape, especiallylandform and vegetation; and

• lighting.

Landfill and mining residue mounds:

• height above surrounding landscape;

• size of footprint;

• configuration of footprint;

• steepness of the angle of outer slopes;

• regularity and angularity of outer slopes(both vertical and horizontal profile);

• length of time the outer slopes are exposedbefore they are vegetated;

• time sequence for vegetation of separatemounds;

• success of vegetation programs; and

• distance to nearest public viewpoints.

Industry:

• size of area covered by buildings andplant;

• siting and design of large individualelements such as stacks or tanks;

• configuration and design of plant, includingcolour and reflectivity;

• alignment and design of access roads andrail links, especially embankments andbridges;

• fencing;

• design of entry statements and signs;

• location and planting of parking areas;

• screen planting;

• lighting; and

• extent of alteration of original landscapeacross the entire site, such as the extent ofvegetation removal.


PART THREE


Design of rehabilitation planting

Rehabilitation exercises may have reducedeffectiveness when the plant species used are notlocal to the area, as this may result in poor growthand an obviously unnatural appearance. Plantingmay also look unnatural if planted in a regimentedpattern.


The principles and guidelines outlined below areintended for use in the development of proposalsfor industry, mines, quarries or extraction pits, andin the assessment of their visual impacts andactions to ameliorate negative impacts. The aim inmany instances is to ensure that these uses arenot evident in the landscape, at least followingeventual rehabilitation. This objective is morelikely to apply to mines and quarries in sensitivelandscapes such as on elevated land nearsettlements.

Industry, however, is more likely to be part of alandscape that has already been modified, forexample, adjacent to port facilities or urban areas.In these cases, the aim is more likely to reducethe prominence of the site in its industriallandscape context.

The focus is on addressing visual landscapeissues. There is overlap with other issues such asenvironmental concerns, as these have an effecton visual landscape character.


Location of mines or industry in sensitivelandscapes

The location of industry, mines or quarries may bean issue for the community where these areproposed for location in landscapes that havehigh cultural values, such as the Burrup Peninsulaor historic areas of Kalgoorlie-Boulder, or valuednatural landscapes such as coastal dunes atLancelin.

Prominent siting of old mines and quarries

Contemporary policy in relation to prominentmining and quarry operations ensures that theyare at least partly obscured from public view.Prominently sited older mine and/or quarry facesmay be of concern when on elevated sites suchas scarp faces or hill-sides, for example, quarrieson the Darling Scarp in the Perth metropolitanarea. Poor siting may provide little potential forscreening.

Siting and design of roadside borrow pits

Roadside gravel pits may be prominent whereroad-base material has been obtainedimmediately adjacent to the road, withoutscreening or subsequent rehabilitation. They maybe particularly noticeable along scenic roads orroads to recreation sites.

Design of rehabilitation earthworks

Earth bunds constructed to obscure views ofmine-sites and quarries, rehabilitated mine orquarry slopes and mounds comprising miningresidue or waste may draw attention due to theirunnatural overall form and slopes. These featuresmake it less likely that the sites will beunobtrusive, even if the rock surfaces exposed bymining or quarrying operations are no longervisible.

Image 104: Maintaining a tidy site is important inindustrial sites adjacent to major roads.

PART THREE


The siting of a quarry or mine is likely to beprimarily related to the operational needs ofobtaining the resource. Buildings, fixed plant andstockpiles should be located and designed toreduce their visibility. This may entail using naturaltopography and existing vegetation for screeningpurposes, planting more vegetation to enhancescreening or careful selection of buildingmaterials and colour.

The working faces of mines or quarries may beoriented to minimise their public visibility. Facesoriented towards the south may be lessnoticeable, as less sunlight will reflect off theexposed surfaces.

Access roads should be aligned to avoidproviding a direct view of operations from nearbypublic view locations such as roads, lookouts orrecreation sites. Screen planting may assist, ifaccess roads are prominent (Figure 3.35).

Ideally, industrial, waste or mining structures andoperations, including tall stacks, would not bevisible from important local view locations such asbeaches. As a minimum objective they should notbe highly visible or dominant. Structures maybecome valued as orientation or landmarkfeatures, but this function can be maintained whileportions of the structures, such as their base, arescreened from view.

Rehabilitation following the closure of mining,extraction and land fill can improve landresources, with land eventually being reused foragriculture, rural residential or recreation uses, forexample. The aim of rehabilitation should be torestore the land to its original form, or to prepare itfor alternative land uses. The timing ofrehabilitation should be addressed, to avoiddelays. Interim rehabilitation may be appropriatewhere works have ceased for an unknown lengthof time.

These uses should be located where they are lesslikely to have negative effects on landscapevalues; for example, sites that lack naturalvegetation or landform diversity or are alreadydegraded, although it must be stated that it maybe difficult or visually inappropriate to establishdense vegetation on such sites. For example, ifclimatic conditions are harsh or vegetation maybe out of character in a naturally open landscape.Mining and extractive uses should avoid sites thatare prominent in important views, especiallywhere they are located at the focal point of views.

The visibility of mines, quarries and industryshould be assessed from the propertyboundaries, from near and distant residences andfrom neighbourhood vantage points such aspublic roads. Detailed analysis of views should beundertaken to determine if there are specificmeasures that could be tailored to individualviewing locations. Terrain cross sections mayassist.

Unsatisfactory

Critical viewpoint

Satisfactory

Critical viewpoint

Figure 3.35: Screening access roads.

PART THREE


Visually prominent local plant species should beused around and in the site, for example, inboundary planting, median strips in adjacentroads, entry statements and in car parks.

It is preferable to retain as much remnantvegetation at sites as feasible, to assist inproviding a buffer and screen. This will help in thelong-term rehabilitation of the site and inmaintaining visual links with the landscapesetting. In particular, visual integration will beassisted by the retention of large individual treesand areas of feature species such as grass trees,zamia palms or species of wattles. Plantingaround the immediate base of prominent industrialstructures such as tanks may reduce thestarkness of their appearance.

Buffer zones that incorporate remnant vegetationshould be retained to provide extra distance fromnearby public viewpoints.

Ornamental species such as pines, palms orbottlebrushes are visually inappropriate for use atmining, quarrying or industrial sites that arelocated in natural landscapes. In agriculturallandscapes there may be some non-indigenousspecies that are traditional to the area that may beused in association with structures, such asavenue planting along an access road.

The retention of remnants of the original landformand vegetation in mining, quarry, waste disposalor industrial sites may assist in maintaining visuallinks with the local landscape. They mayeventually be integrated with the rehabilitatedlandform and vegetation.

Quarry or mining operations may expose visuallyinteresting rock formations such as limestonepinnacles. These should be retained wherefeasible, even if this results in the retention ofsteeper slopes than would be typical in theoriginal landscape. Some exposed slopes may beleft in this condition to weather naturally over time.

Efforts should be made to improve theappearance of old mines or quarries that were notsubject to current standards for screening andrehabilitation. Screening may not be feasible butthere may be other appropriate measures, suchas site cleanups and buffer planting.

Sites should be kept tidy, for example, stockpilesshould be contained, spills cleaned up promptly,and material and equipment kept in definedareas.

Pipelines and powerlines should be locatedunderground where feasible, but the groundsurface will require rehabilitation.

Adverse environmental impacts, such assedimentation of watercourses or spread ofdieback disease, should also be avoided on thebasis of their visual impact. This may apply to off-site areas.

Lighting may alter the nighttime landscape. Inlocations where this is considered undesirable, forexample where lit mine sites are visible from anearby natural recreation site used at night forcamping, lights can be angled and shaded awayfrom view locations, and away from the sky ingeneral.

Vegetation and landform in the site

Retain natural landform features and vegetationwherever feasible in industrial, mining, quarry orwaste management sites; for example, remnanttrees could be incorporated in parking areas.

Image 105: Retention of natural landscape featuresin the vicinity of industry assists in integratingindustrial uses into the general landscape.

PART THREE


Planted earth bunds may provide a screen if localplants alone cannot provide the desired heightand density of screening. Ideally earthworkswould not be used for screening as they arevisually prominent unless vegetated, and theyrarely emulate natural landforms.

Terrain cross-sections can be used to determinethe required height of screening earthworks andvegetation planted on the mounds. Cross-sectionsshould be compiled from major viewpoints suchas roads and lookouts to the components to bescreened.

To facilitate plant growth on the sides of moundsor on mine or quarry faces, terraces may becreated. These would contain deeper soil, in adish or channel formation to enhance retention ofnatural surface water runoff. Taller, more deep-rooted trees may survive better on the terraces,with lower, more shallow-rooted plants on thesteeper, intervening slopes. Due to terraces orcontour drains causing water to accumulate, thismay lead to erosion. Prior evaluation of thestability of such areas for regrowth is stronglyrecommended.

Stockpiles of topsoil may be mulched and plantedwith groundcovers to reduce weed invasion untilused for rehabilitation purposes.

Rehabilitation planting

Stockpiles, mining residue and mounds of landfillshould be vegetated. They may also be used asbunds to provide screening. Local provenancespecies are encouraged for rehabilitation planting.

Rehabilitation should use a range of species witha variety of growth rates, such as plantingfast-growing wattle species together with slowergrowing plants. The fast growing species willprovide short-term screening while longer-lived,slower growing species are becomingestablished.

Benches on rehabilitated slopes may providedeeper soil for more intensive planting and enabledeeper-rooted plants such as trees and larger

Earthworks

Earthworks under consideration in this sectioncomprise bunds for screening, mounds of residueand waste material and landfill mounds andearthworks to rehabilitate a site. Some of thestrategies below could also be applied to therehabilitation of quarry or mine faces.

Re-contouring to rehabilitate a mined site shouldre-establish the original landform character andnatural vegetation diversity wherever technicallyfeasible. There may be a tendency to simplifycontours and to reduce topographic extremes,but this may result in a site that stands out from itssurrounding landscape due to its low-keycharacter.

The gradients of the top and side-slopes of largebunds and rehabilitated soil or waste moundsshould be typical of those naturally found in thelocal landscape.

The stability of the final landform using minewaste material may require a different approachthan recreating natural landforms. In terms of thestability of the landform to undertake suchrehabilitation, it is strongly recommended that thisbe assessed prior to commencement ofrehabilitation. Where it is not technically feasiblefor earthworks to replicate original contours,slopes should still be naturalistic in appearance,using such measures as irregular cross-slope anddown-slope profiles.

Large residue or landfill mounds should betreated to make them appear less extensive, forexample by indenting the edges, or evenbreaking large single mounds into several smallerones. However, this is not always cost-effective.

The form and profile of earthworks should be asnatural in appearance as feasible throughouteach stage in the establishment of thesestructures; for example, as measured at two orfive year intervals. It is inadequate for only thefinal stage of rehabilitation to look naturalistic,particularly if the rehabilitation is to take placeover a long time frame.

PART THREE


Screen planting should look as natural aspossible; for example, by planting in a randompattern, incorporating plants of various heightsincluding understorey shrubs and canopy treeswhere these are found in the local landscape, andusing a selection of plants that have a variety ofgrowth rates. A variety of vegetation speciesshould be used, representing a variety of plantforms and sizes, such as trees and shrubs andplants that grow at a variety of rates. Dominationby a single species such as fast-growing acaciaspecies or other local disturbance species shouldbe avoided.

Off-site planting

Additional planting beyond the actual industrial,waste or mine site may assist by drawing viewers’attention away from these operations. Forexample, planting may be located alongroadsides or watercourses, and at the edges ofareas of remnant vegetation, as well as scatteredin paddocks.

Feature plants such as grass trees may be usedin foreground locations.

Increased general planting along local roads willmake the landscape appear more enclosed,reducing the likelihood of an operation beingvisible.

Use of textured, dark coloured material may assistin reducing glare from light-coloured rock faces.

shrubs to be established. Again, the stability ofthe soil needs to be assessed prior to anyrehabilitation plans.

It may be appropriate for tall trees to be used inrevegetation, for example, if they are typical of thelandscape setting. They should be located closeto the base of slopes with shorter vegetationhigher upslope. It is preferable not to plant talltrees on the upper sides of mounds or on the top,as will this will increase the apparent height of themound. Restricting tall trees to the lower slopes orland adjacent to the base of mounds and bundsmay have a more natural appearance and plantsare more likely to survive than if trees are plantedon the entire side slope.

Vegetation health across entire sites should bemonitored for one year and over the long term toensure that screening and rehabilitation areeffective.

Screen planting

Care is needed to determine the best location forscreen planting and the dimensions and plantingdensity required to provide the desired screen.Screen planting is typically located close to thefeature being screened. Screen planting may alsobe effective if it is located: close to offsiteviewpoints, such as near roads or other majorviewpoints; at sites where it screens operationsthat are at a focal point viewed from a road bend;to screen views from recreation sites such asbeaches. These screen-planting locations may besome distance from the operation.

The required height of screen planting may bedetermined by using cross sections between theindustrial or mine site, and important viewpoints.The height required for screening will be lowerwhen viewed from closer viewpoints and tallerwhere planting is nearer to the object to bescreened.

Image 106: Roadside gravel pits require restorationof vegetation or pasture.

PART THREE


neutral or functional colour could be chosen; forexample, unpainted metal or concrete surfaces, toallow structures to naturally take on the local earthcolour.

Large objects such as tanks and towers generallyappear smaller and therefore less prominent ifcoloured in darker shades. It may be preferable touse the same colour as other adjacent structuresto assist in their visual integration.

Tall towers are more likely to be seen against thesky rather than against a vegetated backdrop, sogreys are more likely to be an appropriate colourchoice than greens.

Particular care is required when choosing a shadeof green for structures, because commonly usedgreens such as emerald green, forest green orteal are rarely found in natural Western Australianlandscapes. The light grey-green metal sheetingcolour known as mist green is often suitable incoastal areas, but may be too light for otherlandscapes. It is more likely that the appropriategreen will be a drab, dark grey-green or olive.Greens should be carefully colour-matched todominant local vegetation.

The use of reflective surfaces such as zincalumeshould be minimised where the objective is toreduce the visibility of structures. It is preferableto use surfaces that can dull readily and take onthe natural colours of the local landscape.

Roadside extraction pits

Roadside extraction pits should be buffered fromroads and be rehabilitated as soon as possible,using local native plants or converting toagricultural uses, as appropriate.

Ensure that access tracks do not provide directvisual access into borrow pits.

Sites and their buffers should be kept tidythroughout their use; for example, with surplusmaterials such as concrete footings, disusedequipment and small stockpiles removed, andvehicle tracks minimised.

Hygiene measures should be used to reduce therisk of spreading plant diseases such as dieback.

Any weeds introduced by extraction activity innatural settings should be removed promptly, tominimise spreading into adjoining nativevegetation.

Structures

Structures associated with industry, mining andquarry sites may be easier to screen if they arelocated at lower sites in the landscape and keptlow in height. They may be sited to make use ofany natural screening provided by landform.

Buildings and other structures should be paintedaccording to a simple colour scheme that visuallyunifies the variety of structures at a site, providinga cohesive appearance. For example, a singlecolour may be used for exterior elements such astanks, stairs, platform railings and elevated pipes.

Colours used for buildings and other structuresshould be those found in the local landscape,such as vegetation colour in a well-vegetatedlandscape, and earth tones in more sparselyvegetated landscapes. Darker colours aregenerally less prominent than lighter colours, andduller textures less prominent than smooth orreflective surfaces. Where local earth tones arelikely to appear from dust from operations, a

Image 107: The colour for industrial facilities innatural landscapes should be chosen with care toensure they blend with their setting. The colourscheme should also be simple as in this facility nearBroome.

PART THREE


Mining operations or industrial complexes maylook less prominent if structures are groupedtogether as seen from major viewing points,rather than being spread out. Large structuressuch as cooling towers, tanks or stacks may beless dominant if integrated with other structuresat a site by being placed centrally and at theback of a group of structures as viewed frommajor viewpoints, rather than at the outer edge,at the front, or isolated from the main group ofstructures.

The natural profile of prominent landforms suchas ridgelines should be retained where feasibleby not locating structures on ridgelines orskylines.

Local, natural materials or colours should beused for infrastructure such as entry statements,paths and internal roads visible from principalviewpoints.

The use of black for boundary fencing is likely toreduce its visibility. Green fencing is usually morevisible, because the shades of greencommercially available are usually brighter thanlocal vegetation. Boundary fencing should belocated inside any perimeter screen planting, sothat fencing can be obscured by the screenplanting.

PART THREE


Bibliography 155

Appendices 160

Appendix 1: Table 1 and Table 5 160

Appendix 2: Existing planningmechanisms 162

Appendix 3: Relevant policy measures 165

Appendix 4: Implementation andplanning applications 166

Appendix 5: Glossary 171

Appendix 6: Status of visual landscapeplanning in WesternAustralia - state and localgovernment 173

Appendix 7: Visual landscape characterpreference indicators 175

Appendix 8: Methods case study 178

Appendix 9: Strategies for location, sitingand design to achieve eachspecific visual managementobjective 181

Appendix 10: Deciding on location,siting and design 184

Acknowledgments 185

Feedback Form 187

Bibliography/Appendices


Volume 1 Coastal Visual Landscape EvaluationProcedure, A report for the Department of Environment& Heritage Coastal Management Branch, QueenslandAustralia.

Cherrie, T.D. 1999, Assessing Aesthetic LandscapeValues – a community participatory methodology,Masters Thesis, Geography Department, University ofWestern Australia.

Cherrie, T.D. 1993, Assessing Aesthetic LandscapeValues: towards a public participatory methodology,Masters preliminary thesis, Geography Department,University of Western Australia.

Cherrie, T.D. & Alexander, I. 1997, A community impactassessment of the proposed resort development atMiddleton Bay, Albany WA, A regional developmentproject for the Town of Albany, Perth Western Australia.

Clegg, S.A. 1990, Albany Region analysis of visualfeatures, views, landscape sensitivity and pressures, areport produced for the Department of Planning andUrban Development’s Albany Regional Planning Study,Western Australia.

Coastal Council of New South Wales 2003, CoastalDesign Guidelines for NSW, Coastal Council NSWAustralia.

Cottenham Village Design Group 2001, Cottenhamvillage design statement, Countryside Commission,United Kingdom.

Countryside Commission 1998, Protecting our finestcountryside: advice to government, Northampton,United Kingdom.

Countryside Commission 1992, Protected landscapes inthe United Kingdom, Manchester, United Kingdom.

Countryside Commission 1991, Environmentalassessment: the treatment of landscape andcountryside recreation issues, Manchester, UnitedKingdom.

Daniel, T.C. & Boster, R.S. 1976, Measuring landscapeesthetics: The scenic beauty estimation method, USDAForest Services Research Paper RM-167, United States.

Daniel, T.C. & Vining, J. 1983, Methodological issues inthe assessment of landscape quality in I. Altman & J.Wohlwill (eds.) Human Behaviour and EnvironmentVol.6, Plenum Press, New York.

Dearden. P. & Sadler, B. (eds.) 1989, LandscapeEvaluation: approaches and applications, WesternGeographical Series, University of Victoria, BritishColumbia, Canada.

Department of Conservation and Land Management(CALM), 2001, Shark Bay World Heritage PropertyLandscape Study: Managing Community Enjoyment,Recreation, Tourism and Development, prepared for theMid-West Region, CALM, Planning and Design Section,CALM, Como.

Bibliography

Alan Tingay and Associates 1998, A strategic plan forPerth’s Greenways (Final Report), Department ofEnvironmental Protection et al, Perth, Western Australia.

Al-Kodmany, K. 1999, Using visualisation techniques forenhancing public participation in planning and design:process, implementation and evaluation in Landscapeand Urban Planning, Vol 45.

Antrop, M. 1997, The concept of traditional landscapesas a base for landscape evaluation and planning inLandscape and Urban Planning, Vol 38.

Appleton, J. 1975, The Experience of Landscape, JohnWiley & Sons, London.

Arthur, L.M., Daniel, T.C. & Boster, R.S. 1977, Scenicassessment: an overview in Landscape Planning, Vol.4.

Australia ICOMOS 2005, Mountains of Meaning inHistoric Environment, Vol. (18) 2.

Australian Wind Energy Association 2002, Best practiceguidelines for implementation of wind energy projects inAustralia, in conjunction with the Australian GreenhouseOffice, Canberra.

Australian Wind Energy Association and AustralianCouncil of National Trusts 2005, Wind Farms andLandscape Values: Stage one final report – IdentifyingIssues, Commonwealth of Australia, Canberra.

Balling, J.D.& Falk, J.H. 1982, Development of visualpreferences for natural environments in Environmentand Behavior, Vol 14 (1).

Berleant, A. 1992, The Aesthetics of Environment,Temple University Press, Philadelphia.

Bourassa, S.C. 1992, The Aesthetics of Landscape,Belhaven Press, London.

Bourassa, S.C. 1993, Reshaping the AustralianLandscape: on the roles of aesthetics and criticism,paper for the Urban Research Paper, AustralianNational University, Canberra.

Brisbane City Council 2000, Scenic Amenity –measuringcommunity appreciation of landscape aesthetics, Finalreport of the Moggill Scenic Amenity Pilot Study,Brisbane City Council, Queensland.

Brown, T. & Itami, R. 1982, Landscape principles study:procedures for landscape assessment andmanagement - Australia in Landscape Journal, Vol. 1(2).

Burmil, S, Daniel, T and Hetherington, J. 1999, Humanvalues and perceptions of water in arid landscapes inLandscape and Urban Planning, Vol 44.

Catherine Brouwer Landscape Architects & Chenoweth& Associates Pty Ltd 1994, A visual landscapeevaluation procedure for the Queensland coastline,


Forman, R.T.T. 1995, Land Mosaics: the ecology oflandscapes and regions, Cambridge University Press,Cambridge.

Government of British Columbia 2001, VisualAssessment Guidebook, Province of British Columbia,Canada.

Green, R. 2000, Scenic and town character assessmentin Australian Planner, Vol. 37 (1).

Grierson, R. 1994, Towers for tomorrow in LandscapeDesign, June 1994.

Hanna, K.C. and R.B. Culpepper 1998, GIS in SiteDesign, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, New York.

Institute of Environmental Assessment and TheLandscape Institute 2002, Guidelines for Landscapeand Visual Impact Assessment (2nd Edition), E & FNSpon, London.

Institute of Environmental Assessment and TheLandscape Institute 1995, Guidelines for Landscapeand Visual Impact Assessment (1st Edition), E & FNSpon, London.

Joint Venture Agro-forestry Program 2004, FarmForestry and Landscape Architecture: a feasibility study,RIRDC Publication No. 04/187.

Leonard, M. and Hammond, R. 1984, LandscapeCharacter Types of Victoria, Forests Commission,Victoria.

Linchen, J and Gross, M. 1998, Back to the future, backto basics: the social ecology of landscapes and thefuture of landscape planning in Landscape and UrbanPlanning, Vol 42.

Lothian, A. 1999, Landscape and the philosophy ofaesthetics: is landscape quality inherent in thelandscape or the eye of the beholder? in Landscapeand Urban Planning, Vol 44.

Marsh, W.M. 1998, Landscape Planning: EnvironmentalApplications, John Wiley and Sons, Inc. New York.

Nasar, J.L. (ed.) 1988, Environmental Aesthetics:Theory, Research and Applications, CambridgeUniversity Press, Cambridge.

New South Wales & Environment Commission 1978,Guidelines for siting rural dwellings in coastal areas – amethod for environmental and scenic protection, NSWand Environment Commission, NSW.

O’ Brien, M. & Ramsay, J. 1992, Assessing theAesthetic Values of Landscapes: for the Register of theNational Estate, Discussion paper prepared for theAustralian Heritage Commission.

Planning NSW 2002, Wind Energy Facilities Draft EIAGuidelines, New South Wales.

Department of Conservation and Land Management1997, Leeuwin-Naturaliste Landscape AssessmentStudy, Stage 1 Report, prepared for the Leeuwin-Naturaliste Ridge Planning Review, Western Australia.

Department of Conservation and Land Management1994, Reading the Remote: Landscape Characters ofWestern Australia, Department of Conservation andLand Management, Como, Western Australia.

Department of Conservation and Land Management1994, Guidelines for Integrated Forest Harvest Planningand Design, Western Australia.

Department of Conservation and Land Management1994, Guidelines for Managing Plantation Landscapes,Western Australia.

Department of Conservation and Land Management1993, Radio Communications Facilities, PolicyStatement 49, CALM, Western Australia.

Department of Conservation and Land Management1989, Visual Resource Management on Land andWaters managed by CALM, Policy Statement 34, CALM,Western Australia.

Department of Conservation and Land Managementand Fire and Emergency Services Authority 2001,Guidelines for Plantation Fire Protection, WesternAustralia.

Department of Environment Queensland 1997, A view ofthe coast: an overview of the scenic resources of theQueensland coast, State of Queensland.

Department of Minerals and Energy 1994,Environmental management of quarries: development,operation and rehabilitation guidelines, WesternAustralia.

Department of Planning and Urban Development 1993,Darling Scarp Regional Park and Landscape Study,Perth, Western Australia.

Department of Planning and Urban Development 1995,Easy Guide to Townscape, Perth, Western Australia.

Department of Planning and Urban Development 1990,Townscape Guide, Perth, Western Australia.

Department of Urban Affairs and Planning 2000, CoalMines and Associated Infrastructure EIS Guideline, NewSouth Wales.

Dramsted, Olson and Forman 1996, LandscapeEcology principles in Landscape Architecture and LandUse Planning, ASLA, Island Press and HarvardGraduate School of Design.

Environmental Protection Authority 2005, EnvironmentalGuidance for Planning and Development: GuidanceStatement No.33 (for testing and review), EPA, WesternAustralia.


Smardon R.C., Palmer J.F. & Felleman J.P. (eds.) 1986,Foundations for Visual Project Analysis, John Wiley &Sons Inc., New York.

Sustainable Energy Development Office (SEDO) 2006,Renewable Energy Handbook for Western Australia,Government of Western Australia.

Sustainable Energy Development Authority of NSW(SEDA) 2002: NSW Wind Energy Handbook, SEDA NewSouth Wales.

Sustainable Energy Authority Victoria 2002, Policy andPlanning guidelines for development of wind energyfacilities in Victoria, Sustainable Energy AuthorityVictoria.

Swan River Trust 2002, Conservation, land use andlandscape preservation, Policy SRT,EA 1, Swan RiverTrust, Western Australia.

Swan River Trust 2001, Riverview No.24 – Protecting theSwan River Landscape, Swan River Trust, WesternAustralia.

Swan River Trust 1997, Swan River System LandscapeDescription, Report No.28, Western Australia.

Swan River Trust and Western Australian PlanningCommission 2002, The Swan and Canning RiversPrecinct Plan Handbook, Swan and Canning RiversPrecinct Planning Project, Western Australia.

Tang, S.M and Gustafson, E.J 1997, Perception of scalein forest management planning: challenges andimplications in Landscape and Urban Planning, Vol. 39.

The Countryside Agency 2000, Planning tomorrow’scountryside: working for people and places in ruralEngland, Countryside Agency Publications, UnitedKingdom.

The Macaulay Land Use Research Institute 2006,Review of existing methods of landscape assessmentand evaluation, Aberdeen, United Kingdom.

The Mobile Carriers Forum Local GovernmentAssociation Taskforce 2006, Guidelines for LocalGovernment ACIF Code: Deployment of Mobile PhoneNetwork Infrastructure, Urban and Regional PlanningSolutions, Australia.

Thompson Palmer Pty Ltd 2000, Leighton MarshallingYards Regional Planning Guidelines: assessment ofviews, vistas and landscape character, Ministry forPlanning, Perth, Western Australia.

The Urban Design, Cultural Heritage & Landscape Unit(Gold Coast City Council) 2000, Gold Coast CityLandscape Strategy Part 1: Landscape character:guiding the image of the city, Gold Coast City Council,Queensland.

Planning South Australia 2002, Department of Transportand Urban Planning: Planning for Wind Farms FactSheet, South Australia Development Act 1993, SouthAustralia.

Preece, R.A. 1991, Designs on the Landscape:everyday landscapes, values and practice, BelhavenPress, London and New York.

Ramsay, J. & Paraskevopoulos, J. (eds.) 1993, Morethan meets the eye: identifying and assessing aestheticvalue, Report of the Aesthetic Value Workshop,Australian Heritage Commission, Australian CapitalTerritory.

Revell, G.R.B. 1991, Managing and sustaining visuallandscape values in Western Australia’s South Westforests: proceedings of the seminar – a review of Roadand River Stream Zones in South West forests, Landand Forests Commission, Western Australia.

Sadler, B. & Carlson, A. (eds.) 1982, EnvironmentalAesthetics, Essays in Interpretation, WesternGeographical Series Vol. 20, University of Victoria,British Columbia, Canada.

Scottish Natural Heritage and The Countryside Agency2004, Landscape Character Assessment. Guidance forEngland and Scotland, Topic Paper 6: Techniques forJudging Capacity and Sensitivity, The CountrysideAgency and Scottish Natural Heritage, Cheltenham,<http://www.countryside.gov.uk/LivingLandscapes/countryside>

Scottish Natural Heritage and The Countryside Agency2002, Landscape Character Assessment. Guidance forEngland and Scotland, The Countryside Agency andScottish Natural Heritage, Cheltenham<http://www.countryside.gov.uk/LivingLandscapes/countryside>

Seddon, G. 1997, Landprints: reflections on place andlandscape, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Seddon G 2004, Sense of Place: a response to anenvironment, the Swan Coastal Plain, Western Australia,Bloomings Books, Melbourne.

Seddon, G. & Polakowski, K.J 1977, PowerTransmission, South-Western Australia: a review of routeselection procedures, a report prepared for the StateEnergy Commission of Western Australia, Centre forEnvironmental Studies, University of Melbourne.

Shire of Busselton 1999, Caves Road VisualManagement Policy, Busselton Shire Council, WesternAustralia.

Shire of Busselton 2004, Adopted Scheme PlanningPolicy (Town Planning Scheme No.20) CombinedMethodologies 413 Smiths Beach Road, Yallingup(Schedule 10, pursuant to Clause 103), Busselton ShireCouncil, Western Australia.


Western Australian Planning Commission 2004, StatePlanning Policy 5.2 Telecommunications Infrastructureand Guidelines for the Location Siting and Design ofTelecommunications Infrastructure (complementary toState Planning Policy 5.2), Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2003,Environment and Natural Resources Policy, StatePlanning Policy 2, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2003, CoastalPlanning and Management Manual: a community guidefor protecting and conserving the Western Australiancoast, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2003, StateCoastal Planning Policy 2.6, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2003, FarmForestry Planning Bulletin 56, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2002,Residential Design Codes (R-Codes), Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2002, RuralDevelopment Control Policy 3.4 Subdivision of RuralLand, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2002, StatePlanning Policy 2.5 Agriculture and Rural Land UsePlanning, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2002, StatePlanning Policy 3.1 – Residential Design Codes,Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2001, RuralDevelopment Control Policy 3.7 Fire Planning, WesternAustralia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2001, AvonArc Sub-Regional Strategy, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2000,Applications for Telecommunications InfrastructurePlanning Bulletin 46, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2000, BushForever Volume 1 and Volume 2, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2000, LiveableNeighbourhoods Edition 2, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2000, LiveableNeighbourhoods, Street Layout, Design and TrafficManagement, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2000, Towardsa vision for Perth in 2029, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 1998, DraftMorseby Range Management Strategy, WesternAustralia.

The Urban Design, Cultural Heritage & Landscape Unit(Gold Coast City Council) 2000, Gold Coast CityLandscape Strategy Part 2: Landscape worksdocumentation manual, Gold Coast City Council,Queensland.

United States Department of Agriculture, Forest Service1995, Landscape Aesthetics: A Handbook for SceneryManagement, Agriculture Handbook Number 701,USDA Forest Service, Washington.

Utility Providers Services Committee 2002, UtilityProviders Code of Practice, Western Australia.

Water and Rivers Commission 2001, Water notes forrivers management No.16, Advisory notes for landmanagers on river and wetland restoration, Governmentof Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2006,Designing Out Crime Planning Guidelines, WesternAustralia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2006, DraftLower Great Southern Regional Strategy, WesternAustralia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2006, PerthCoastal Planning Strategy: community engagementprogram summary outcomes report, Perth CoastalPlanning Strategy Steering Committee, Government ofWestern Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2004, CentralRailway Precinct Guidelines, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2004,Guidelines for the preparation of local rural strategies,Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2004,Guidelines for wind farm development, Planning Bulletin67, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2004,Liveable Neighbourhoods Edition 3, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2004,Liveable Neighbourhoods Review Task 1: ReviewChanges in Design Approaches 1996-2002, WesternAustralia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2004, NetworkCity: community planning strategy for Perth and Peel,Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2004,Ningaloo Coast regional coast strategy Carnarvon toExmouth, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 2004, StatePlanning Policy 6.3 Ningaloo Coast, Western Australia.


Western Australian Planning Commission 1998, StatePlanning Policy 6.1 Leeuwin-Naturaliste Ridge, WesternAustralia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 1998, StatePlanning Policy 4.3, Poultry Farms, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 1997, LiveableNeighbourhoods Edition 1, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 1997,Telecommunications Infrastructure Planning Bulletin 22,Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 1996, StatePlanning Strategy, Western Australia.

Western Australian Planning Commission 1992,Guidelines for rural residential development in the Perthmetropolitan area, Western Australia.

Western Power 2003, Transmission Plans 2003-2008(5 year capital works plan), Western Australia.

Williamson, D.N. & Calder, S.W. 1979, Visual resourcemanagement of Victoria’s forests: a new concept forAustralia in Landscape Planning, Vol 6.

Williamson D.N. 1979, Scenic perceptions of Australianlandscapes: research needs in a new frontier inLandscape Australia, Vol.2.

Zube, E.H. et al, (eds.) 1975, Landscape Assessment:Values, perceptions and resources, Dowden Hutchinson& Ross Inc. Pennsylvania.

Zube, E.H, Sell, J.L. & Taylor, J.G. 1982, Landscapeperception: research, application and theory inLandscape Planning, Vol. 9 (1).


Appendices

Appendix 1

Indicativescale

Plan type

Detailrequired

Regional strategies, regionalplans, sub-regionalstrategies.

Example from DEC:framework plans.

Local planning schemes,local planning strategies,local rural strategies.

Example from DEC: areamanagement plans.

Subdivision plans,development applications,outline development plans.

Example from DEC: siteplan.

1: 25 000 to 1: 100 000 1: 1000 to 1: 25 000 Less than 1: 1000

Regional Local Site

• Broad inventory andassessment of regionalscale patterns andlandscape characteristics.

• Understanding of visuallandscape character,community perceptions,values and issues isneeded.

• Recommendations toaddress broad-scalelandscape issues andgeneralised communityattitudes andvalues.

• Comprehensiveunderstanding required.

• Inventory andevaluation of visuallandscape character,issues and communityvalues.

• Provision of context andvisual managementobjectives.

• Comprehensiveknowledge ofsite-specific landscapecharacteristics andissues.

• Comprehensiveknowledge of regionaland local contextualinformation.

• Assessments usuallyundertaken in responseto a specificdevelopment proposal.

• Detailed inventory,assessment and planningsolutions.

Professional expertise

Is required (at leastconsulted); but may not beessential at this leveldepending on the scope ofeach project andcommunity member skills.

Is required; someassessment techniques inthe visual impactassessment requiretechnical expertise.

Is required; simulations ofdevelopment proposalsmust be accurate and anumber of inventory andassessment techniquesrequire specialistexpertise.

Table 1: Types of plans that are relevant to each scale of application and detail required at eachlevel of application


Level 2: regional significance

• main roads with moderate levels of vehicle usage (sealed or unsealed);

• recreation, conservation, cultural or scenic sites, areas, viewpoint, and lookouts of regional or high localsignificance (including their access routes);

• navigable waterways of regional recreation significance;

• walk, cycle or bridle paths of regional significance; and

• views of regional importance.

Level 3: local significance

• all remaining roads with low levels of vehicle usage;

• locally significant roads or tracks;

• recreation and other use areas of local significance;

• navigable waterways of local recreational significance;

• walk, cycle or bridle paths of local significance; and

• views of local importance.

Explanatory note - Significance increases with the:

• importance of views, including type, features, rarity;

• volume of use of roads, trails and navigable waterways;

• degree of sensitivity of viewers; those who are more likely to be more sensitive include wilderness users,other recreational users, tourists, people who choose to live in an area because of its landscape characterand views (eg assessed by noting how vocal observers are about specific travel routes or use areas,indicated in letters, protests etc);

• degree to which experiencing the landscape is integral to enjoyment of a travel route or site. Is it the focusof the use, as in recreational use, or just incidental, as is more likely with people using a route to work?and

• length of duration of a view; range could include glimpses from a high speed road, longer duration viewsobtained from roads used for sightseeing or from recreation sites and lookouts and very long and frequentviews from the main living areas of homes.

Level 1: national/state significance

• State highways and other main roads (sealed or unsealed) with high levels of vehicle usage;

• designated tourist routes, scenic drives;

• recreation, conservation, cultural or scenic sites, areas, viewpoints and lookouts of state or nationalsignificance, including their access routes;

• walking, cycle or bridle tracks of national or state significance;

• towns, settlements or residential areas;

• passenger rail lines;

• navigable waterways of national or state recreation importance;

• ocean sites of national or state recreation importance eg surf breaks; and

• views of national or state importance.

Table 5: Levels of significance for viewing locations and viewer experience


These are broad, statewide statutory policymeasures that can guide landscape protection,maintenance and enhancement at regional, localand site levels of land use planning andmanagement.

Policy development: State governmentagencies and local government authorities

The Department of Environment and Conservation(DEC) (previously the Department forConservation and Land Management CALM)developed one of the first policies for visuallandscape management in Western Australia(1989) to ensure that all land uses managed byDEC are planned and conducted in a way thatprotects and sustains the quality of landscapecharacter: Policy Statement 34 – Visual ResourceManagement on Land and Waters Managed byCALM.

The Environmental Protection Agency hasproduced a guidance note on variousenvironmental considerations under EPA policy,with visual amenity being one component (EPAEnvironmental Guidance for Planning andDevelopment, Guidance Note 33, 2006). This hasstatutory and non-statutory status where, forexample, a proposal is referred to the EPA andresults in a non-formal assessment, resulting innon-binding advice for the protection oflandscape amenity. If a referral requires a formalassessment, where visual amenity is acomponent, then this results in legally bindingministerial conditions that may include landscapeprotection advice.

Some local authorities have developed policies toprotect certain landscape character areas. Forexample, the Shire of Busselton has developedtwo policies – the Caves Road VisualManagement Policy (1999) and the YallingupSpecial Character Policy (1996). These assist inthe protection of existing visual landscapecharacter when development proposals are beingconsidered in those areas.

Appendix 2

Existing planning mechanisms

Policy development – Western AustralianPlanning Commission

The WAPC has produced the Environment andNatural Resource State Planning Policy 2 (ENRSPP) (Sept 2002), which includes several policymeasures that recognise the significance oflandscape.

The policy sets out general measures thatrecognise:

• the diversity of landscapes that exist in WA;

• a growing community appreciation ofnatural landscapes;

• a recognition that unique landscapes in WAprovide opportunities for recreation andtourism; and

• that landscapes change in response toexisting land use demands and future landuse planning.

The State planning policy guides the protectionand restoration of WA landscapes by advisingthat planning strategies, schemes and decisionmaking should:

• identify and protect landscapes with highnatural resource values (such asecological, aesthetic or geological) andencourage the restoration of degradedlandscapes;

• consider the capacity such landscapeshave to absorb new land uses and givecareful consideration to the planning, sitingand design of proposed development sothat it is sensitive to the character of thelandscape; and

• consider the need foe a landscape, culturalor visual impact assessment fordevelopment proposals that may impactupon sensitive landscapes.


Existing non-statutory mechanisms

Strategic planning mechanisms such as the Stateplanning strategy, regional strategies,sub-regional strategies and local planningstrategies can be powerful tools to guide theprotection and restoration of landscape values.Strategic planning mechanisms usually apply toregional and local scales of application, but canalso guide local town planning schemepreparation for site level applications.

Regional strategies are useful to protect broadscale landscapes that may have regional or localsignificance. Landscape values can be includedin environmental strategies along with othernatural resources, by the identification of portionsor features of the landscape that are significant tothe wider community or require restoration. Anexample of a regional strategy that considerslandscape values is the draft Lower GreatSouthern Regional Strategy (WAPC 2007).

Sub-regional strategies are developed under thesame planning process but are applied at asmaller scale than regional strategies. Visuallandscape assessments are then undertaken atthe smaller scale. The Avon Arc Sub-RegionalStrategy (WAPC 2001) is an example of theconsideration of landscape values in addition tostrategies developed for other natural resourcesand future land use planning.

The most effective planning tool to incorporatelandscape values at a local level, which then inturn guides site level planning, is the localplanning strategy prepared by localgovernments. This level of strategic planning canidentify local landscape values and directinappropriate development away from areas ofhigh sensitivity at an early stage. Visuallandscape assessments of such areas can beundertaken at the preparatory stages of thestrategy. This would provide local governmentswith more accurate information about the existinglandscape character of the area and assist in thedevelopment of appropriate objectives to protectlandscape areas of high significance, as well asrestoring landscape areas that are degraded.

In the preparation of local planning strategies, theDepartment for Planning and Infrastructureprovides local governments with mapped datasets including information such as remnantvegetation and topography. A landscapecharacter map sourced from Reading The Remote– Landscape Characters of WA (CALM 1994) andfurther divided into smaller landscape charactertypes could also be provided at this draft stage,in areas where landscape is regarded as asignificant issue. This landscape information isuseful for designating appropriate areas for futuregrowth and development, inclusion of provisionsin local planning schemes for landscapeprotection and in the assessment of rezoning andsubdivisions.

Planning bulletins are another type ofnon-statutory document that may provideguidance for the protection of landscape.An example is the Guidelines for Wind FarmDevelopment – WAPC Planning Bulletin 67 (2004),where visual landscape guidelines are stated inconsideration for the siting and design of windfarms in Western Australia to ensure minimalaffect on existing landscape character.

Existing statutory mechanisms

There is a wide range of existing statutes andstatutory mechanisms that may provide authorityfor landscape protection and enhancement.Examples are as follows:

Legislative mechanisms

• State planning legislation (The Planningand Development Act 2005).

Local planning schemes

• zoning, designation or zoning of landfor landscape protection orlandscape protection with limiteddevelopment, reservation of land forConservation of Parks andRecreation, special control areasrequiring criteria to be addressedand/or consultation sought for thispurpose;

• reservation of land for parks and recreation(under the Metropolitan, Peel and BunburyRegion Schemes);

• Bush Forever sites (Perth region);

• declaration of planning control areas forheritage conservation, special controlareas;

• environmental protection legislation(eg mine site rehabilitation) ;

• Department of Environment andConservation legislation (eg national parks,nature reserves, marine parks, regionalparks);

• WA Register of Heritage Places(eg individual trees, streetscapes, towns);

• Regional Forest Agreement (areas of StateForest protected from logging);

• Botanic Gardens and Parks Authority(Kings Park, Bold Park);

• Rottnest Island Authority (Rottnest Island);and

• legislation protecting rare and endangerednative flora and wildlife habitat.

Non-legislative mechanisms

• buffers around industries (eg quarries);

• dieback control measures includingquarantine areas; and

• Crown reserves or vacant Crown land(eg coastal and foreshore reserves).

• scheme provisions which mayinclude criteria for assessingapplications for subdivision anddevelopment in specific areas or forspecific types of development;

• requirements for outlinedevelopment plans which addresslandscape protection, andconditions relating to rehabilitationand preservation;

• Crown reserves (those vested inlocal authorities); and

• identification of heritage areas.

WAPC State planning policies

• State Planning framework (VariationNo.2) 1;

• Environment and Natural ResourcesState Planning Policy 2;

• State Coastal Planning Policy 2.6;

• Amendment to State Planning Policy2.6;

• Agriculture and Rural Land UseState Planning Policy 2.5;

• Water Resources State PlanningPolicy 2.9;

• Swan-Canning River System StatePlanning Policy 2.10;

• Historic Heritage Conservation StatePlanning Policy 3.5;

• Leeuwin-Naturaliste Ridge StatePlanning Policy 6.1;

• Urban Growth and Settlement StatePlanning Policy 3;

• Ningaloo Coast State Planning Policy6.3;

• Residential Design Codes StatePlanning Policy 3.1; and

• Telecommunications State PlanningPolicy 5.2 (including guidelines forthe location, siting and design oftelecommunications infrastructure).


Appendix 3

Relevant policy measures

Excerpt from Environment and NaturalResources Policy: State PlanningPolicy 2 (WAPC 2003):

5.9 Landscape

Western Australia has a diversity of high valuelandscapes and scenic areas, many of which areunique to Australia. These range from theunmodified semi-arid and subtropical landscapesof the north and east of the State to modified ruralfarming landscapes in the south-west, andencompass a diversity of natural coastallandscapes, vast flat plains, mountain ridges andforested areas.

There is an increasing appreciation and valuing ofnatural landscapes by the community. Theselandscapes provide opportunities for recreationand tourism and fulfil a psychological need inproviding a contrast to the urban environments inwhich the majority of Australians live.

It is recognised that landscapes change inresponse to demands for primary products,recreation and tourism as well as for rural living.The values of the community with regard tolandscapes also change over time. As the Stategrows, it will be increasingly important to ensurethat those landscapes that are valued by thecommunity are protected. To do this it isnecessary to identify the landscape types andfeatures requiring special attention, and todevelop appropriate management and planningpolicies that can positively contribute to theirmaintenance and enhancement.

Planning strategies, schemes and decision-making should -

(i) Identify and safeguard landscapes withhigh geological, geomorphological orecological values, as well as those ofaesthetic, cultural or historical value to thecommunity, and encourage the restorationof those that are degraded.

(ii) In areas identified in 5.9 (i) above, considerthe level or capacity of the landscape toabsorb new activities and incorporateappropriate planning and building designand siting criteria to ensure that newdevelopment is consistent and sensitive tothe character and quality of the landscape.

(iii) Consider the need for a landscape, culturalor visual impact assessment for land use ordevelopment proposals that may have asignificant impact on sensitive landscapes.



Working examples where landscapeconsiderations have been incorporated intoplanning documents

Appendix 4

Implementation and planningapplications

Visual landscape evaluation enables goals anddirections for landscape protection to beincorporated in regional and local strategies. Thisin turn enables criteria and rules to be included inregion and local planning schemes. Throughvisual impact assessment during the normalassessment of a development application theproposal can be measured against these rules.

The WAPC expects visual landscapeconsiderations to be included along with manyother considerations in plan making anddevelopment assessments, as it has been in theexamples cited below. It is not generallyappropriate for planning authorities to impose newrequirements relating to the visual landscapewhen a development applicant is submitted. If avisual landscape evaluation has not been made,and if visual landscape criteria are not included inthe planning scheme, requirements andconditions relating to the visual landscape shouldbe confined to matters already provided for in thescheme.

Appendix 2 identifies a range of relevantplanning mechanisms that the Western AustralianPlanning Commission may use to implementplanning and environmental objectives such aslandscape protection.

The mechanisms that exist can incorporatelandscape protection, and possibly also assist inlandscape enhancement and restorationrequirements. The choice of appropriatemechanisms will depend on the particularcircumstances ie whether visual landscapeevaluations are undertaken for a region, locality orsite; or the status of the landscape in the planningprocess as well as the determining authority (egstate government or local government).

Regional Landscape Background Report(2006) prepared for the LowerGreat Southern Regional Strategy(WAPC 2007); Avon Arc Sub-Regional Strategy (WAPC 2001)

Local The Swan and Canning RiverPlanning Precinct Handbook(WAPC Swan River Trust 2002);Caves Road Visual ManagementPolicy (Shire of Busselton 1999)

Site ‘Combined Methodologies –February 2004’ for SussexLocation 413 Smiths Beach Road,Yallingup adopted as a policypursuant to clause 103 (2) (c) ofthe Shire of Busselton TownPlanning Scheme 20.

Integration of outcomes into planningexercises

This section describes how visual landscapeplanning outcomes and landscape considerationscan be integrated with planning exercises atregional, local and site level applications.

Regional level

Strategic plans at a regional level may locatediscussion of landscape under various umbrellaheadings, such as environment, heritage, tourismor social factors.

Strategies related to landscape are integratedwith other strategies for example, treatment ofrural roadsides addressed with transportstrategies, ensuring that relevant agencies areaware of the strategies. It may be appropriate toalso have a separate section that addressesvisual matters throughout the region. This mayentail broad regional strategies, or strategies


viewing landscape features such as roadsorientated towards the coastline, a water body orhills.

Visual impact assessments provide guidance onevaluating and undertaking proposeddevelopments, including identification ofmeasures to minimise potential impacts under theplanning scheme, these assessments may be arequirement as part of a development application,for example if the visual management objective ofa site is protection and maintenance of existingcharacter. They may be prepared by proponentsand undertaken by external consultants.

Site level visual landscape planning and standardmethodologies may be adopted by localgovernment and implemented as policy forsensitive sites, such as the methodologiesadopted by the Shire of Busselton for SmithsBeach.

Where there are multiple constraints fordevelopment with water issues, land capability,statutory measures can include landscapeprotection for a site. Examples include buildingenvelopes, special control areas and landscapeprotection areas identified in local planningscheme provisions.

At a site level, visual impact assessments mayresult in siting and design criteria beingdeveloped. When incorporating into a planningscheme these may be implemented as conditionsof development approval.

Consultation

Community consultation for visual landscapeevaluation should be a component of the widerplanning process (eg community workshops thatmay include landscape issues).

Preferably, consultation between the developerand planners is conducted at the earliest stage, toavoid any potential negative visual impacts,disagreements about methodology and approachand community concern. Discussion before thesubmission of major development proposals is

specific to landscape planning, such as studiesto investigate community preferences andconcerns.

Visual landscape strategies and mapping can beintegrated into any units used as a framework inregional planning, such as planning precincts orcatchment areas. Planning precincts may bebased on landscape character units.

Regional level landscape evaluations providevisual management objectives that can be usedto develop specific strategies such as the Shire ofBusselton’s Caves Road Visual ManagementPolicy (1999) (Figure 1 of this appendix), or maybe applied to individual planning precincts.

Local level

Visual landscape evaluations may provide thebasis for definition of local level planningprecincts, using landscape character units,viewshed boundaries, or general visualabsorption levels, for example. Regional or locallevel visual landscape strategies may then feedinto the appropriate precinct or unit.

Local planning schemes may include provisionsthat are based on visual landscape evaluation,such as landscape protection zones thatencompass areas or features identified as highlyvalued for their landscape character. Theidentification of these areas for protection may befurther used in the development or review of localplanning strategies where relevant.

Decisions regarding land uses may take intoaccount the desirability of protecting valuedgeneral character or specific individual featureseg by creating buffers adjacent to individualfeatures such as mountain ranges.

Site level

Visual landscape evaluations for sites will assist inthe development of proposals that reflect thecharacter of the site and acknowledge viewingopportunities. For example, individual landscapefeatures may be retained, and subdivision roadsand open space may provide corridors for


Appendix 4, Figure 1: The Shire of Busselton has developed a policy for the Caves Road viewshed, taking intoaccount visibility from the road, visual absorption capacity and landscape character.

essential for implementation of landscapeconsiderations to be effective.

There is no point in seeking comments if it is toolate in the planning process for the proposal to bemodified.

Consultation at an early stage will ultimately bringtogether the developer’s concepts with theappropriate planning authorities that can adviseon:

• what is required for landscape protection;if a visual landscape evaluation has beenconducted, then agreement can bereached on what outcomes will be usefulfor the development proposal; and

• if an evaluation has not been completed,then guidance can be given on whatapproach will be the most useful.

Informing the relevant community about aparticular development (particularly if it ispotentially sensitive) may be helpful in obtaininginformation regarding local opinion. It may also bea tool for developers and planning authorities togain a perspective on the community’s sense ofregional identity and local character of the area inquestion.

Contact details of landscape evaluation experts,consultants, government representatives(strategic and statutory) that have an interest inlandscape considerations is helpful to have onhand. Any problems in implementation or requiredchanges to a proposal will be easier to managewith the appropriate contact details of all expertswho can assist with such problems.

Role of determining authorities

The determining authority has a very specific rolein obtaining the most effective outcome fordevelopment proposals that require landscapeinput. Considerations include how to encouragethe best results from the developer, how to reviewthe visual landscape component of the planningissue, and how to modify the outcomes ifnecessary.

Most effective visual landscape planning isrealised at a local level. Guidance is required forlocal governments in regard to planning for areasof high landscape value, and specificdevelopment applications that may be a localcommunity issue.

Region and sub-region strategies

Visual landscape strategies developed at aregional and sub-regional level (regionalstrategies, sub-regional strategies) can giveguidance to local governments in planning forareas of landscape significance. The strategies atthe regional level need to be clear and concise toensure ease of implementation at the localplanning level. The determining authority mayprovide local government with specificrecommendations on how each of the landscapestrategies can be implemented in strategic andstatutory outcomes (Appendix 2).

Regional visual landscape evaluations andstrategies can provide a clear framework for theconsideration of landscape issues in developmentcontrol and allow local government to guidedevelopment to suitable areas. They can adviseon existing landscape character, areas identifiedfor landscape protection and restoration and onany key issues that need to be addressed suchas urban fringe restoration.

Specific development proposals

There are a number of ways in which planningauthorities and others can give support andguidance to those responsible for the planning,design and assessment of new developmentproposals. It is the developer’s responsibility toseek this guidance.

It would be most helpful, if the developer canseek professional advice on any landscapematters to complement the formal standardplanning context of the development proposal. Atthis detailed level landscape design guidancecan help encourage local distinctiveness inbuilding layout, style, materials and choice ofplant species.


Planning and management strategies based oncommunity values may also requirere-assessment over time as social structures andperception of landscapes evolve.

Local governments have the authority forenforcement, where conditions are imposed tomeet particular landscape planning objectives.Conditions of planning approval can specify thestages at which the landscape recommendationsare implemented.

Regarding the content of the visual landscapeevaluation and visual impact assessment it isgood practice for the developer to work closelywith relevant professionals in regard to the scopeand method required. Developers should seekguidance on the level of detail required for theconsideration of landscape issues such as theprotection of certain features (such as trees orhistorical features), contents of the proposal suchas scale and implementation ideas, plantingdesign, earthworks, drainage, infrastructure andboundary treatments.

A review of the completed visual landscapeevaluation and/or visual landscape assessmentby the developer and the relevant authority isdesirable for the particular development proposal.If the outcomes and recommendations (egstrategies, cross-sections, character mapping,assessment of impacts) are inadequate, then theauthority may consider requesting the developerto supply additional information.

Review

Planning documents such as regional strategiesand schemes undergo a review process. Anylandscape management objectives and actionsthat are included in such documents can bereviewed at this time.

Landscapes are naturally dynamic andcommunity sentiments change over time.Monitoring would ideally continually assesschange and the effectiveness of measures takento reduce the impacts of unwanted change. Somechanges may be incremental, so they may not berecognised in the short term. They may beunforeseen and therefore not addressed in initiallandscape management recommendations.



Visual landscape evaluation is the process ofevaluating the character of areas of land, usuallyby reference to an agreed set of criteria basedprimarily on community preferences. This manualfocuses on visual landscape evaluation, whichrelates to the visual appearance of a landscape.

Landscape impacts are changes in the characterand quality of the landscape that occur as a resultof development, while visual impacts relate tothe appearance of these changes.

Visual impact assessment is the analysis ofchanges in the appearance of the landscape as aresult of development. Impacts may be eithernegative or positive.

Landscape features are visually dominant, easilyidentified or significant characteristics in alandscape.

‘View’ comprises a portion of a landscape seenby an observer.

Viewshed or seen area is a portion of thelandscape that can be seen from one or moreobserver positions. The extent of area that can beviewed is normally limited by landform, vegetationand distance.

Observer position is the placement andrelationship of a viewer to the landscape that isbeing viewed.

Viewpoint the point from which a view isobserved.

Key view an area, especially a broad landscapeor panorama that is in constant sight from theobserver’s viewpoint either in motion or standingstill, that is of high value.

View significance a portion of a landscape seenby an observer that is highly valued.

Appendix 5

Glossary

The term visual landscape, as applied in thismanual, refers to the appearance of an area ofland, incorporating the combination of elementssuch as landform, vegetation, water bodies andhuman land use. The emphasis is on visualcharacteristics.

Visual landscape character refers to theappearance of those landscape elements such aslandform, vegetation, water bodies and humanland use that makes an area identifiable orunique.

Landscape character units refers to areas ofhomogenous (similar) patterns of visualcharacteristics such as landform, vegetation,water form and land use as well as individualfeatures.

Landscape protection refers to actions taken toensure that valued individual characteristics oflandscapes, or landscapes in their entirety, aremaintained.

Landscape values describes those landscapecharacteristics that the community considers aresignificant for reasons such as their aesthetic(predominately visual), social, environmental andheritage values.

Landscape design is the process of locating anddesigning landscape works at a local or site level.Components include site planning, site designand detailed design. The visual elements of form,line, colour and texture are importantconsiderations.

Visual landscape planning applies at a broaderscale than landscape design. It is concerned withminimising visual impact on valued landscapecharacter by identifying appropriate types of landuses and careful location and design ofdevelopment.

Texture refers to visual characteristic of a surfacewhen looked at (ie rippled, smooth, rough).

Community refers to the residents who areaffected by decision-making processes, as wellas interest groups and stakeholders, ranging fromgovernment bodies, business and industryorganisations and the media.

Community values comprise the values thatresidents as well as various interest groups suchas government bodies, business and industryorganisations and the media, place upon theirenvironment and surrounds.

Visibility can be defined in two ways:

• whether a feature and/or landscape can beseen or not; and

• how far away the feature and/or landscapeis from the observation point.

Visual absorption capacity refers to an area’sability to visually absorb or sustain change as aresult of new development, without altering theoverall character of the landscape, based onvariables such as landform, vegetation patternand height, and existing land use.

Diversity in a landscape can be assessed interms of how much variety there is in a particularlandscape character unit, as well as the degree ofdiversity that is typically displayed.

Unity relies on the repetition of similar elementsand the balance between elements, proportion,scale and enclosure. The degree to whichcontrasting elements may disrupt unity in alandscape depends on the context; a single newand different feature in an otherwise unifiedlandscape may cause a high degree ofdiscontinuity.

Form refers to the shape and volume oflandscape features. Form may be identified atdifferent levels, from the form of mountain rangesto that of typical tree species. The edges of formsmay be considered separately as lines, eg the topof a ridge form may be identified as a prominentline in the landscape.

Enclosure is created if landscape elements arelocated so that they enclose space, eg remnantvegetation in paddocks, buildings at the edge ofopen space.



currently under review to accommodate a widerrange of land uses and the mapping done for theSouth-West is being updated.

The Department for Planning and Infrastructurehas developed broad policies to promotelandscape protection. Landscape protection hasalso been incorporated into regional level policy,in the case of the Leeuwin-Naturaliste area.Regional strategies have also addressedlandscape as a natural resource for protection.Developers have been encouraged to considerlandscape values, and visual landscapeevaluation has been included in regional planningexercises. The agency has led the developmentof this visual landscape planning manual, to assistin the implementation of landscape protection intothe planning process.

The Environmental Protection Authority (EPA) hasbeen a long-term promoter of landscapeprotection through its efforts to protectbiodiversity, and soil, air and water quality. TheEPA has also required development proponents toaddress the visual impacts of their proposals,such as the Ten Mile Lagoon wind farm atEsperance. In a landmark case in 1991, PalaceVerdes Pty Ltd was deemed by the EPA to havecaused visual pollution in its illegal clearing ofaccess roads on the Nullaki Peninsula, oppositethe town of Denmark. Provisions in the new Actwill have a substantial positive effect on rurallandscapes by reducing the amount of nativevegetation being cleared.

The Main Roads WA requires the assessment ofpotential visual impacts (eg intrusion, overlooking)

as part of the environmentalinvestigations for roadworkprojects. The agency also putsconsiderable effort intorevegetation of roadsides and intothe design of roads and bridges toenhance visual quality and reducevisual impacts on adjacentlandholders.

Appendix 6

Status of visual landscape planning inWestern Australia – state and localgovernment

Both State and local government agencies havetaken specific action to protect landscape valuesover the past few decades. State agencies thathave taken a role include the Department ofConservation and Land Management, theDepartment for Planning and Infrastructure, theDepartment of Environmental Protection, MainRoads Department, Swan River Trust and theWestern Australian Heritage Council.

The previous Department for Conservation andLand Management (CALM), now the Departmentof Environment and Conservation (DEC)developed a system of broad-scale landscapeevaluation, known as the Visual LandscapeManagement System, derived from a similarsystem pioneered in the 1960s by the US ForestService. This system is applied to DEC-managedlands and waters, and has been used in townplanning tribunal cases to substantiateassessment of the visual impact of developmentproposals. A landmark case was the 1994proposal for a subdivision at Wyadup Rocks, inthe Shire of Busselton. CALM has made a majorcontribution by producing ‘Reading the Remote:Landscape Characters of Western Australia’(1994). This document divides the State into 39major landscape units, which are described interms of their physical character, land use,aesthetic character and visual quality. DEC’sVisual Landscape Management System is

Appendix 5, Image 1: Landscape planners and architectsrepresenting CALM (now DEC), DPI and Main Roads meet to discusscross-agency landscape planning concerns.

The Swan River Trust has undertaken an inventoryof Swan and Canning River landscapes, as a firststep in assisting local authorities to establishplanning and design guidelines and policies forlandscape precincts along the river system.

State heritage agencies, such as the HeritageCouncil and the National Trust WA, are primarilyconcerned with protecting buildings and theirimmediate surrounds. Some attention has beengiven to broader landscapes that are highlyvalued on natural and cultural heritage grounds.

Local authorities have increasingly includedprovisions in their local planning schemes or inconditions attached to subdivision approvals thatare designed to protect landscape quality.Examples include: provision of landscapeprotection zones in town planning schemes;specification of non-reflective roofing materials insome special rural subdivisions; building heightlimits along the coast; and restrictions on clearingof remnant native vegetation. In urban areascouncils have made determinations of proposednew residences based primarily on the degree towhich the proposed building is considered to fitinto the existing streetscape.



Appendix 7

Visual landscape characterpreference indicators

Effective planning and management of visuallandscapes must be based on a comprehensiveunderstanding of community perceptions,preferences and values. This knowledge can begained from various sources including a largebody of existing perception research, surveys andcommunity testing, workshops and personalinterviews.

Where comprehensive project based perceptionstudies are not available, assumptions should bebased on community workshops and surveys. Inaddition, perception research conducted in WAand elsewhere in Australia indicates substantialagreement as to indicators of visual landscapecharacter in natural, rural and built landscapes.

The list opposite suggests some of the keycharacter indicators that provide a basis forclassification of landscape and features into twopreference categories: most preferred; and leastpreferred.

Every project will be different. Project managersshould use the character indicator lists during thecommunity consultation process to stimulatediscussion and as guidelines to be modifiedand/or refined to suit local conditions andpreferences.

The character indicators have been establishedfor the three land categories: natural, rural andbuilt landscapes.

Visual landscape character preferenceindicators

“Most preferred”:

Character indicators for most preferred can bedefined as landscapes and features that arehighly valued by the community, and thatcontribute to the visual character of thelandscape.

Natural landscape character:

• high degrees of perceived naturalness;

• high degree of topographic variety orvertical relief (dramatic relief, ruggedness,rock outcropping, outstanding ridgelinesand beach forms);

• vegetative diversity (distinctive patterns,species composition, height, colour andtexture);

• diversity of vegetation age and density(structural complexity);

• unusually expansive landforms or vasthorizontal scale (desert landscapes, beachand dune fields, rolling hills);

• presence of water bodies (waterfalls, rivers,estuaries, oceans, lakes, inundated areas);

• distinctive displays of colour: soils,vegetation (often seasonal), topography,rock formations or water bodies;

• distinctive landscape features (waterfalls,unique plants, reefs, geological formationssuch as ranges, cliff faces and graniteoutcrops);

• outstanding combinations of landform,vegetation patterns and water features inone area;

• seascapes (combinations of ocean, reefs,beach, dune formation, coastal rocks,coastal vegetation); and

• areas or sites frequently prone toephemeral features (fauna, water or waveconditions, beach erosion scarps, climaticconditions).

• built developments that do not impinge ondominant natural features (for example, theDarling Scarp, river foreshores and coastallandscapes);

• coherence of industrial buildings in onearea (eg industrial parks and buffers);

• elevated landforms and undulating terrain;

• presence of water bodies;

• presence of natural rock features (eglimestone cliffs, granite outcrops);

• historic features including land uses thatstrengthen the local urban character;

• well maintained gardens (native andexotic);

• incorporation of significant cultural andenvironmental features into urban design;

• urban water management (water bodiesthat are well maintained, and open drainswith a complementary appearance to thesurrounding built form);

• development sites supporting andenhancing the urban context in which theyare located;

• development sites designed so theystrengthen local character and promote asense of community;

• design which takes account of landscapefeatures, vegetation and landform;

• services being underground to reducecabling and severance of street trees;

• unobtrusive mobile phone towers and otherutility towers;

• unobtrusive advertising;

• presence of community artworks;

• multi-storey buildings that maintain theCBD character (graduated skyline andgaps between clusters of buildings to allowviews).


• unusual diversity in agricultural landscapes(colour and contrast or species diversity ofcropping);

• agricultural patterns, colours and texturesthat complement natural features;

• gradual transition zones betweenagricultural land and natural landscape;

• topographic variety and ruggedness;

• presence of water bodies (dams, lakes,inundated areas) that borrow location,shape, scale and edge configuration fromnatural elements;

• areas or sites frequently prone toephemeral features (presence of fauna,distinctive crop rotations, water conditionsand climatic conditions);

• significant landscape features (trees andtree stands, historic relics, some windmillsand areas of unusual topographicvariation);

• settlement patterns and individualstructures that strengthen the local ruralcharacter (silos, windmills, water tanks,historic buildings, bridges, hay bales anddams);

• historic features and land use patterns thatstrengthen the local rural character (historicfarm machinery, old shearing sheds,windmills and historic buildings); and

• distinctive remnant vegetation locatedalong streamsides, roadsides and inpaddocks (parkland cleared paddocks).


• presence of trees, greenery, parks andgardens, street trees, canopied streets,median strip vegetation;

• complementary building styles inneighbourhoods;

• diverse building styles in neighbourhoods;


Visual landscape character preferenceindicators

“Least preferred”:

Character indicators for least preferred can bedefined as landscapes and features that arenot valued by the community, and to detractfrom the visual character of the landscape.

Natural landscape character

• disturbed areas with little evidence ofnaturalness;

• areas of diseased, dead or dyingvegetation;

• areas with severe weed infestations in anatural landscape;

• areas of soil erosion (especially wherehuman-induced);

• water bodies with degraded banks, weedinfestations, stagnation, eutrophication,algae or litter; and

• evidence of mining (gravel pits, sandmines, limestone).


• areas of soil salinity/salt scalds or dead,dying or diseased vegetation;

• areas of extensive weed infestation;

• eroded areas;

• tips, dumps and landfill areas;

• recently harvested areas (stumps, debris,abandoned off-cuts);

• land use areas that contrast significantlyfrom natural landscape characteristics (caninclude plantations, mines, rural settlementand/or housing, utility towers, roads andfencing);

• abandoned structures in a state ofdisrepair or destruction;

• unmanaged roads and access tracks;

• farm structures and buildings in a state ofdisrepair;

• jetties and other marine structures that areeither closed or not maintained; and

• eutrophied dams, lakes and water bodies.


• derelict industrial areas (junkyards);

• large carparks without trees;

• run-down residential areas (dead grass,bare sand, dead vegetation, derelicthousing and/or buildings, abandonedand/or trashed cars)

• graffiti;

• intrusive billboards (particularly alongroads and railway reserves);

• buildings which contrast sharply from thesurrounding built character (large isolatedshopping centres, apartments, hotels);

• arterial highways with strip commercial andlight industrial developments, lacking treesand other vegetation;

• utilities (towers, transmission lines,overhead powerlines);

• severed or badly pruned street trees;

• lack of vegetation;

• degraded areas prone to depreciative usesand unregulated vehicle activities;

• poorly maintained waterways and drainsprone to stagnation, pollution and littering;

• extensive areas of urban sprawl lackingvegetation or public open space;

• extensive retaining walls which result inconcrete canyon effects on roadways;

• buildings that create a solid wall effect(no gaps to allow views betweenbuildings).



• Shoreline dunes parallel to the coast in anarrow band, cutting off the seaward endof the linear dunes. Some blowouts onwindward slopes.

• Beach south of the point; fairly narrow.

• Rocky shoreline from the point northwards;horizontal rock platforms, black undercutsurfaces. Pale orange, heavily pittedmarine limestone.

• Island off the point; same character asrocky shoreline. Low elevation withadjoining rock platforms.

• The aquarium point; Promontory oppositethe island, comprising low rock platform ofdeeply dissected and weathered paleorange limestone.

• Low grasses and heath vegetationthroughout the site. Predominance of greytones, due to the dominance of Oleariaaxillaris over the entire site, and Attriplex onthe foredune.

Land use

• Lighthouse as landmark cultural feature.White sides with red cap above lightcomponent. Unsympathetic addition ofplatform near top.

• Road; flush with adjacent land, little cutand fill or camber.

• Toilets; very prominent, vertical structuresof treated pine, located adjacent toextensive parking areas.

• Shacks in a variety of states of repair, ageand style. Some strong colours, includingmid range greens, bright blue, red.

• Beach shelters comprising timber framewith palm fronds for roofs.

• Introduced shrubs and trees amongst theshacks; tamarisks, Brazilian peppers.Darker and brighter greens than themajority of native plants.

Appendix 8

Methods case study

Case study: methods application at a sitelevel: “The Blowholes” Carnarvon Coast,Ningaloo.

Introduction

This example is an evaluation of The Blowholes, apopular coastal location north of Carnarvon.

A site level evaluation was undertaken, based onseveral hours’ field inspection. Visual landscapecharacter is described in terms of features only.The site could have been broken into characterunits but this would not be essential at a site level.Natural features are described in order: landform;waterform; and vegetation. Introduced vegetationis described under land use. The land usefeatures could also be termed cultural or builtfeatures.

Key views are described in terms of accessibilityof each view location, viewshed extent, prominentfeatures and distance to each and visualcharacteristics. Visual management objectives areintegrated with the view description, although theycould have been listed separately. The objectivestake into account the need to retain the visualdominance of existing natural features, based onthe assumption that the suitable overall objectiveat this site is to maintain the natural character.Landscape sensitivity to change is addressed.

Finally, a discussion of future development isprovided. This integrates all topics already raisedand suggests future directions.

Principal landscape features

Natural

• Dune ridges running north–south, withinterdunal swales. Exposed white sand onupper parts of ridges.

Visual management objectives for principallandscape features

In this landscape it is not feasible fordevelopment to be ‘not evident’, although it isappropriate to attempt to blend development intoits landscape setting and to undertake actionsdesigned to enhance the site. Natural landscapefeatures should be maintained as such, withdevelopment sited and designed to minimisevisual impacts. Some development may need tobe located on either the north-south dune ridgesor the dunes that run parallel to the shore acrossthe southern bay. All other natural feature shouldremain free of development. Every land usefeature requires enhancement of some type, toreduce their prominence and to enable greaterprotection of the natural features.

Key view locations and possible visualmanagement objectives for each view

Lighthouse

• Description: Access is currently up asteep four-wheel drive track located on thespine of the ridge. Excellent panoramicviews inland and along the coast. Inlandviews to Lake MacLeod and salt works.Middle-ground views of blowholes; spoutvisible. High dunes to south-east,dominance of low, grey-green vegetation,with good ground cover in swales. Little ofthe shoreline itself is visible, except for ashort section of beach near Black Rock,and the rock island off the point. Existingpedestrian tracks are an intrusiveforeground element. Some immediateforeground interest is created by banksiasnear the view location and along the track.

• Objectives: Existing shacks are barelyvisible from this location. Development atthe new node will be visible if located ontop of the dune ridge that backs theexisting settlement area. It would bepreferable not to have structuressilhouetted against the ocean. Where this isnot feasible, roofs should fit with the stronghorizontal line of the top of primary dune

ridge. No structures should appearsilhouetted against either the island orrocky shore adjacent to the blowholes asvisible from here. Care will need to betaken if the road crosses the foredune in aline between the island and this viewpoint,as the island is a prominent landscapefeature in this view. Formal pedestrian trailsshould be aligned in a less intrusivefashion ie following contours, and greateruse made of swales.

Beach at boat ramp

• Description: Views along the south-eastcoast and to island and reef platform. Dunebackdrop.

• Objectives: Structures in the existingsettlement area and on the ridge behindthis will be prominent above the foredune,requiring careful design. Preferable ifbuildings on the dune behind thesettlement do not break the horizon line.

The aquarium point

• Description: Important viewing positionand/or destination where people are likelyto sit and enjoy the view; to the island, tothe southeast coast and westwards out tosea. Existing shacks are visible from here,seen above the foredune.

• Objectives: Preferable not to seedevelopment from this point as it is arecreation site focussed on the naturallandscape, but this will not be possible.Locations on the backdrop dune ridgefurther west of the shacks may be lessprominent, as the foredune is higher hereand development would be located to theside of the main viewing direction.

Newly aligned entry road to tourism focus area

• Description: First views of the southernbay will be obtained from this road.

• Objectives: A viewing opportunity shouldbe created where the road crosses thedune ridge to the southern bay.


provide views to the southern bay, although careneeds to be taken to ensure that this portion ofthe road is not prominent as viewed from thelighthouse.

Where the road approaches the southern bay atright angles to the coast, the land directly ahead(between the road and the sea) should be left asopen space with no visible development.Otherwise the structures will become a focus ofattention.

Locate chalets on lower south-facing slope ofdune in tourism focus area. This would keep themout of the storm surge area and would providethem with ocean views.

The caravan park area could be located in stormsurge area, although if it were located below thechalets this would disrupt seaward views from thechalets. A solution could be to segment the dayuse, caravans and chalets areas along the coast,beginning with the day use area on the west, nextthe chalets, then the caravan park to the east. Theproblem with this arrangement would be that alltraffic to the caravan park would pass through thechalet area. Ideally, traffic to the day use area andcaravan park would not pass through the chaletarea.

Another option would be to locate the chalets onthe ridge behind the day use area, to the west ofa T-junction, with caravans to the east, and remotetent camping further along the beach towardsBlack Rock. Here there are several extensive,fairly level, sheltered areas on the inland side ofthe track. It would work better if the track wererelocated to the inland side of any campingnodes, although vehicular use would not be sohigh that conflicts between pedestrians andvehicles would be a problem.

The Blowholes

• Description: Unusual foreground attractionof waterspout rising from weathered,fissured, orange marine limestone.

• Objectives: The land immediatelyadjoining the rock platform is very flat andopen. It is preferable to minimise thevisibility of vehicles. Since vegetationscreening is not possible, vehicles shouldbe kept as far from the rock platform aspossible by realigning the road furtherinland and shifting the parking further fromthe coast. The road could pass on theinland side of the toilet, with parkingadjacent to the toilet.

Black Rock beach

• Description: Long views back to theisland, rock platforms at the point, beachand dunes. Dune ridge close to the shorewith well-vegetated swale between mainridge and small foredune.

• Objectives: Development opportunities inthe swale area, especially where undulatingswale terrain provides partial screeningand/or softening. It would be preferable ifbuildings near the existing shacks were notlocated against the horizon line as seenfrom this beach. The distance will reducevisibility. Buildings at higher elevationswould look less prominent if located nearerto the point, as the taller dune wouldprovide a landform backdrop rather thebuildings being silhouetted against the sky.

Future development

Identifying a new road alignment should be anintegral, early step. Possible new road alignment:leaving the existing road south of Blowholes toiletcar park, swinging south easterly through lowerlying ground, and ending at a T-junction betweenthe proposed day use area and accommodationarea. Alternative departure point could be 100-200 m inland from a T-junction, which wouldprovide space for the toilet and parking on theocean side of the road. If possible the new roadshould include an elevated section that would



Design

Some design strategies may result indevelopment being not evident. These focusespecially on colour and texture, including:

• shading of building walls and windows witheaves and verandas;

• use of camouflage colour, usually darkertones;

• use of non-reflective surface materials; and

• use of local materials.

Blending

Strategies

Success in meeting this objective is more difficultto quantify than the objective that developmentshould be not evident. Specific performancecriteria may be identified, against which planningand design proposals can be measured. Thecommunity could assist in developingperformance criteria and in measuring successagainst these. Criteria examples include:

• how much development is it acceptable tosee from designated viewpoints (forexample, how many additional buildings ina rural residential development may bevisible from an adjacent scenic drive,before the landscape begins to look urbanin character);

• how much canopy clearing can occurbefore a bushland landscape loses itsnatural character;

• how tall and/or large should developmentbe, relative to features such as naturallandform and tree height (such as: heightof a building to be below the tallest treesnearby, height of a landfill mound to be nohigher than natural high points in the area);and

• position in relation to landform features (forexample, is it acceptable for developmentto be located on particular landformfeatures and if not, how close, how farupslope, width of buffers around rockoutcrops).

Appendix 9

Strategies for location, siting and design toachieve each specific visual managementobjective

Not evident

Strategies

Development should be located and sited whereit will not be evident in the landscape. It is risky todepend on design alone to ensure thatdevelopment is not evident, although designstrategies may be effective when used inconjunction with locational or siting strategies.

Location

Development may be evident if it is located whereit is visible from roads, paths, recreation sites,especially if it is in the foreground of views.Locational strategies involve ensuring thatdevelopment is not located in these viewsheds.

Siting

Development may be located in a viewshed butcould be carefully sited so that it is not seen fromdesignated viewpoints. This usually entails use oflandform or vegetation screening. Another optionwould be to site development below the normalground level.

Measures to ensure that development is sited tobe not evident may include, (in order of priority):

1. using existing screening provided bynatural landform;

2. using existing screening provided bynatural vegetation (either on-site or off-site,such as road verges);

3. planting a new screen located on-site;

4. planting a new screen located off-site eg inroad reserve; and

5. constructing a new screen usingearthworks such as bunds.

Design

The blending objective may be addressed byapplication of best practice design principles,focussing on visual elements such as form, line,colour, texture, scale and architectural style, forexample:

• use colours that are:

• prominent in the landscape, such assoil, vegetation, rock;

• different to those that are prominentin the landscape, but complementeach other; and

• dark in tone, thereby reducing theiroverall visibility;

• use materials that are:

• prominent in the landscape, forexample rock, rammed earthcomprising local soil or rock; and

• complementary to local materials,even if their appearance iscontrasting;

• vegetation that is local or its appearancecomplements local vegetation.

Prominent

Strategies

Location

A prominent development may be consideredinappropriate anywhere in a landscape that ishighly valued for its existing visual character.

Siting

Prominent status is largely based on thedominance of the structure’s site in the landscape.Prominent sites may include:

• elevated sites that comprise or areadjacent to a natural landscape featuresuch as a coastal headland, cliff-top or hill;

• sites that comprise or are adjacent to acultural landscape feature such as sites inthe centre of a business district;

Strategies need to be developed that refer to thegeneral landscape setting, specific landscapefeatures and important views available in ortowards the landscape. For example, strategiesthat relate to views may include ensuring thatdevelopment is not positioned directly in the lineof view or focal area of an important view.

Location

A decision about whether a particular landscapecharacter unit is a visually acceptable location fora form of development rests largely on whetherthe landscape provides sufficient opportunities forsiting and design strategies. For example, partlyvegetated, undulating rural terrain may be asuitable general location for rural residentialdevelopment, as it may contain sites that areobscured by ridges and remnant vegetation.

Siting

Siting strategies should focus on avoidingprominent locations in landscapes, or in importantviewsheds.

The use of strategically sited planting is aparticularly useful tool to employ when screeningis considered desirable but not feasible, forexample, tall transmission pylons visible from aroad, or a new railway through a valued rurallandscape. The aim of strategic planting is not toscreen development, but to draw viewers’attention away from the development, to giveadditional emphasis to existing natural and rurallandscape features or to alter the landscapecharacter so that it becomes more diverse, withthe result that development may be less obvious.

Natural or cultural vegetation patterns can bereinforced with additional planting so that thelandscape looks more diverse and the structuresare less obvious. Planting of ridges, drainagelines, damp areas, roadsides can supplementexisting vegetation and reinforce the visualdominance of these features, thus downplayingthe development.


• sites that are prominent because of theirposition in a view, such as

• in front of a backdrop, such as ariver foreshore site;

• at a focal point, such as at a trafficroundabout; and

• at the end of an axis;

- natural axis, for example,formed by a stretch of riverending at a bend orpromontory,

- built axis, such as a viewahead along a road.

Design

There are a number of Western Australianexamples of prominent structures. Those that thecommunity appears to generally support oftenhave strong visual links between major designelements and their setting, for exampleBusselton’s town jetty (timber heritage structure),new Fremantle maritime museum (sail forms),Dingo flour mill at North Fremantle (heritage icon)and the Narrows Bridge (low, graceful curveslinking low-lying land at both ends).



Siting strategies

Identify specific sites where the development maybe visually appropriate or inappropriate, using asimilar checklist to the list provided for locationstrategies. Siting strategies may also addresssuch components as:

• overall development footprint size andposition;

• vegetation planning and management;

• planning and siting in relation to openspace; and

• siting of individual structures.

Design:

Design decisions are made at a site level, butneed to be consistent with higher level siting andlocation objectives. Design relates to the detailedappearance of components of a development.The traditional visual elements of form, line, colourand texture are relevant, as are general imageand architectural style.

Design strategies

Design strategies suitable for the specific siteneed to be developed to address componentssuch as:

• the visual elements of form, line, colour andtexture;

• design of structures;

• vegetation retention; and

• landscape treatment design (landscaping),including planting and hard surfaces.

Appendix 10

Deciding on location, siting anddetailed design

Location:

Decisions about the general location for specificdevelopment proposals, or types of use such aswind farms or plantations, may be made inregional or local and/or district level landscapeplanning exercises.

Location strategies

Identify general types of location where theproposed type of development or use is visuallyappropriate or inappropriate. For example:

• urban, rural or natural portions of alandscape;

• particular landscape character units orsub-units;

• areas occupied by individual landscapefeatures such as natural landforms ofremnant vegetation that should beunaltered could be identified;

• views, viewsheds and view experiencesthat should be unaltered could beidentified; and

• locations that have been the subject ofprevious community concern in relation tothe type of use being considered.

Siting:

Siting decisions generally involve a greater levelof detail than location decisions. They are madeat a local or district level, or in relation to aspecific site. It is assumed that the generallocation is acceptable.


Acknowledgments

The visual landscape planning manual has beenprepared by the Department for Planning andInfrastructure, through the collaborative efforts ofthe landscape planning Interagency WorkingGroup:

Tara CherrieDept for Planning and Infrastructure(Project Manager 2006-2007)

Stephanie CleggDept for Planning and Infrastructure(Project Manager 2000-05)

Richard HammondDepartment of Environment and Conservation

Tracy ChurchillDepartment of Environment and Conservation

Stewart CavesDepartment of Environment and Conservation

Joseph FiliaMain Roads WA

Eamonn FennessyDepartment of Conservation and LandManagement (2000-2002)

In order to ensure professional quality of thismanual, the following peer review group revieweddraft material through consultancy:

John Cleary, Brian Curtis, Kevin Martin,Grant Revell, Jim Singleton

Given the technical expertise required to producethe visual landscape planning manual, we wouldlike to acknowledge the following people whowere asked for their specialist comments overthe years of production:

Juliet Albany, Judi Bell,Kylie Carman-Brown, Brett Coombes,Ken Dawson, Janine Griffiths, Larry Guise,Ross Montogomery, Barbara Pedersen,Ray Stokes, Peter Tapsall, Simon Thwaites.

The collaborative efforts of those involved in thepreparation of this manual has ensured itscompletion as a highly relevant and usefuldocument.

Thank you allTara Cherrie,Project Manager


Feedback Form

Why provide comments on the visual landscape planning manual?

We have tried our best to produce effective, workable methods for visual landscape evaluation and visualimpact assessment as well as guidance for several landscape types and uses. However, not all issuesrelated to visual landscape planning have been addressed.

We would like to hear about your experiences on implementing the methods presented and ideas on thematerial that has been provided.

How to provide comments on the visual landscape planning manual

The comments you provide can be as brief or as lengthy as you see necessary. Your use of the manualand any suggestions on how to improve the material is most important.

To ensure that your submission is as effective as possible, it is best to clearly state your suggestion andthe part of the manual you are referring to, and provide reasons for your comments, if possible. We wouldalso be grateful for comments on parts of the manual that worked for you, and are appropriate to yourarea of work.

Comments can be posted or faxed to:

Project manager: Visual landscape planning manualEnvironment and Sustainability DirectorateDepartment for Planning and InfrastructureAlbert Facey House469 Wellington StPERTH, Western Australia 6000Fax: (08) 9264 7566

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Organisation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Address: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Phone: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fax: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Email: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

visual landscape planning in western australia a manual

Documents